gas/testsuite/
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
56dd11f0 3@c Copyright 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
9160ea82
AM
42@ifnottex
43@dircategory Software development
44@direntry
252b5132 45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
46@end direntry
47@end ifnottex
252b5132 48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
56dd11f0 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 57
cf055d54 58Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 59under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
60or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
61with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
62Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 63section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 64@end copying
252b5132
RH
65@iftex
66@finalout
67@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 68@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 69@titlepage
71ba23f6 70@title The GNU linker
252b5132 71@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
72@subtitle @code{ld}
73@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
74@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
75@end ifset
252b5132
RH
76@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
77@author Steve Chamberlain
78@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
79@page
80
81@tex
82{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
83\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
84\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 85\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
86\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
87}
88\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
89@end tex
90
91@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 92@c man begin COPYRIGHT
56dd11f0 93Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2013 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 94
0285c67d 95Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 96under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
97or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
98with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
99Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 100section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 101@c man end
252b5132 102
252b5132
RH
103@end titlepage
104@end iftex
4ecceb71 105@contents
252b5132
RH
106@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
107
84ec0e6d 108@ifnottex
252b5132 109@node Top
71ba23f6 110@top LD
e49e529d
JM
111This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
112@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
113@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
114@end ifset
115version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 116
cf055d54 117This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
118Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
119in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 120
252b5132
RH
121@menu
122* Overview:: Overview
123* Invocation:: Invocation
124* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
125@ifset GENERIC
126* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
127@end ifset
128@ifclear GENERIC
129@ifset H8300
130* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
131@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
132@ifset Renesas
133* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
134@end ifset
135@ifset I960
136* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
137@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
138@ifset ARM
139* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
141@ifset M68HC11
142* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
147@ifset M68K
148* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149@end ifset
833794fc
MR
150@ifset MIPS
151* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
7ee314fa
AM
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 376interface.
7ee314fa 377
252b5132
RH
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 388archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
389family}, for details.
390
ff5dcc92 391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 406that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 419particular format.
252b5132
RH
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 456@item -d
252b5132
RH
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
7ee314fa
AM
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 475
252b5132
RH
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 479@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
b58f81ae
DJ
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 492exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
e1c37eb5
DK
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
252b5132
RH
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
55255dae 535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 538
8b747e1a
DK
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
36f63dca 543@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 554@end ifclear
252b5132 555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 580@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
ff5dcc92 595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 606
3dbf70a2 607@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
252b5132
RH
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
2509a395
SL
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 621@cindex object size
2509a395 622@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 626MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
627sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 630@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 632@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
3dbf70a2 645@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
252b5132 653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 656@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 663
ff5dcc92 664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
ff5dcc92 680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 692@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 694@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
698option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
702order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
252b5132 705
9c8ebd6a
DJ
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
252b5132
RH
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
712some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 721@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
3b83e13a 741Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
252b5132
RH
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
783Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
784libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
785mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
786
787@kindex -N
788@kindex --omagic
789@cindex read/write from cmd line
790@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 791@item -N
252b5132
RH
792@itemx --omagic
793Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
794not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
795libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
796mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
797is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
798specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
799
800@kindex --no-omagic
801@cindex OMAGIC
802@item --no-omagic
803This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
804sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
805be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
806shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
807
808@kindex -o @var{output}
809@kindex --output=@var{output}
810@cindex naming the output file
811@item -o @var{output}
812@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 813Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
814option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
815script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
816
817@kindex -O @var{level}
818@cindex generating optimized output
819@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 820If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 821the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
822should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
823option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
824the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
825no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
826of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 827
a712da20
NC
828@kindex -q
829@kindex --emit-relocs
830@cindex retain relocations in final executable
831@item -q
832@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 833Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
834Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
835order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
836in larger executables.
837
dbab7a7b
NC
838This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
839
4f471f39
RS
840@kindex --force-dynamic
841@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
842@item --force-dynamic
843Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
844to VxWorks targets.
845
252b5132
RH
846@cindex partial link
847@cindex relocatable output
848@kindex -r
1049f94e 849@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 850@item -r
1049f94e 851@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 852Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 853turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
854linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
855magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
856@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 857@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
858If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
859linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
860constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
861
62bf86b4
HPN
862When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
863partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
864relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
865example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
866with input files in other formats at all.
867
252b5132
RH
868This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
869
870@kindex -R @var{file}
871@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
872@cindex symbol-only input
873@item -R @var{filename}
874@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
875Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
876relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
877to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
878programs. You may use this option more than once.
879
ff5dcc92 880For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 881followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 882the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
883
884@kindex -s
885@kindex --strip-all
886@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 887@item -s
252b5132
RH
888@itemx --strip-all
889Omit all symbol information from the output file.
890
891@kindex -S
892@kindex --strip-debug
893@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 894@item -S
252b5132
RH
895@itemx --strip-debug
896Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
897
898@kindex -t
899@kindex --trace
900@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 901@item -t
252b5132 902@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 903Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
904
905@kindex -T @var{script}
906@kindex --script=@var{script}
907@cindex script files
908@item -T @var{scriptfile}
909@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
910Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 911@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 912@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
913output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
914the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
915specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
916options accumulate.
252b5132 917
14be8564
L
918@kindex -dT @var{script}
919@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
920@cindex script files
921@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
922@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
923Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
924
925This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
926processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
927command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
928@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
929behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
930command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
931the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
932@samp{gcc}).
933
252b5132
RH
934@kindex -u @var{symbol}
935@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
936@cindex undefined symbol
937@item -u @var{symbol}
938@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
939Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
940symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
941modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
942different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
943option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
944
945@kindex -Ur
946@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 947@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
948For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
949@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 950turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
951@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
952It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
953with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
954be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
955@samp{-r} for the others.
956
577a0623
AM
957@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
960@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
961missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
962specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
963multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
964input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
965in a linker script.
a854a4a7 966
252b5132
RH
967@kindex -v
968@kindex -V
969@kindex --version
970@cindex version
971@item -v
972@itemx --version
973@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 974Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
975lists the supported emulations.
976
977@kindex -x
978@kindex --discard-all
979@cindex deleting local symbols
980@item -x
981@itemx --discard-all
982Delete all local symbols.
983
984@kindex -X
985@kindex --discard-locals
986@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 987@item -X
252b5132 988@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
989Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
990system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
991or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
992
993@kindex -y @var{symbol}
994@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
995@cindex symbol tracing
996@item -y @var{symbol}
997@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
999option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1000to prepend an underscore.
1001
1002This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1003don't know where the reference is coming from.
1004
1005@kindex -Y @var{path}
1006@item -Y @var{path}
1007Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1008for Solaris compatibility.
1009
1010@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1011@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1012The recognized keywords are:
1013@table @samp
1014
1015@item combreloc
1016Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1017lookup caching possible.
1018
1019@item defs
560e09e9 1020Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1021shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1022
6aa29e7b
JJ
1023@item execstack
1024Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1025
b039ef04
L
1026@item global
1027This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1028the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1029of subsequently loaded libraries.
1030
cd6d6c15
NC
1031@item initfirst
1032This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1033It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1034before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1035the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1036the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1037objects.
1038
1039@item interpose
1040Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1041but the primary executable.
1042
5fa222e4
AM
1043@item lazy
1044When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1045dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1046the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1047Lazy binding is the default.
1048
cd6d6c15
NC
1049@item loadfltr
1050Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1051runtime.
1052
1053@item muldefs
1054Allows multiple definitions.
1055
1056@item nocombreloc
1057Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1058
1059@item nocopyreloc
1060Disables production of copy relocs.
1061
1062@item nodefaultlib
1063Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1064ignore any default library search paths.
1065
1066@item nodelete
1067Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1068
1069@item nodlopen
1070Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1071
1072@item nodump
1073Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1074
6aa29e7b
JJ
1075@item noexecstack
1076Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1077
1078@item norelro
1079Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1080
cd6d6c15
NC
1081@item now
1082When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1083dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1084when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1085deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1086first called.
1087
1088@item origin
1089Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1090
6aa29e7b
JJ
1091@item relro
1092Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1093
24718e3b
L
1094@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1095Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1096
1097@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1098Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1099
04c3a755
NS
1100@item stack-size=@var{value}
1101Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1102Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1103@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1104
cd6d6c15
NC
1105@end table
1106
ece2d90e 1107Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1108
1109@kindex -(
1110@cindex groups of archives
1111@item -( @var{archives} -)
1112@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1113The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1114either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1115
1116The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1117references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1118the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1119archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1120object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1121would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1122they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1123resolved.
1124
1125Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1126it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1127more archives.
1128
69da35b5
NC
1129@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1130@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1131@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1132@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1133Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1134recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1135and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1136the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1137behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1138so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1139restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1140
4a43e768
AM
1141@kindex --as-needed
1142@kindex --no-as-needed
1143@item --as-needed
1144@itemx --no-as-needed
1145This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1146on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1147the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1148on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1149needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1150emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1151non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1152the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries, a
1153non-weak undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
1154Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1155the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1156needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1157from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1158
e56f61be
L
1159@kindex --add-needed
1160@kindex --no-add-needed
1161@item --add-needed
1162@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1163These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1164their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1165options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1166and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1167
252b5132
RH
1168@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1169@item -assert @var{keyword}
1170This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1171
1172@kindex -Bdynamic
1173@kindex -dy
1174@kindex -call_shared
1175@item -Bdynamic
1176@itemx -dy
1177@itemx -call_shared
1178Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1179for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1180default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1181for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1182multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1183@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1184
a1ab1d2a
UD
1185@kindex -Bgroup
1186@item -Bgroup
1187Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1188section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1189object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1190@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1191only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1192
252b5132
RH
1193@kindex -Bstatic
1194@kindex -dn
1195@kindex -non_shared
1196@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1197@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1198@itemx -dn
1199@itemx -non_shared
1200@itemx -static
1201Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1202platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1203variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1204may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1205library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1206option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1207option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1208shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1209references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1210libraries.
252b5132
RH
1211
1212@kindex -Bsymbolic
1213@item -Bsymbolic
1214When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1215definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1216for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1217within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1218platforms which support shared libraries.
1219
40b36307
L
1220@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1221@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1222When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1223symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1224This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1225libraries.
1226
55255dae
L
1227@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1228@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1229Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1230typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1231global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1232within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1233to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1234in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1235which support shared libraries.
1236
1237The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1238scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1239
40b36307
L
1240@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1241@item --dynamic-list-data
1242Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1243
1244@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1245@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1246Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1247is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1248
0b8a70d9
L
1249@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1250@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1251Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1252
252b5132
RH
1253@kindex --check-sections
1254@kindex --no-check-sections
1255@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1256@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1257Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1258been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1259perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1260suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1261allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1262restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1263Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1264force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1265option.
252b5132 1266
ddbb8a31
NC
1267@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1268@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1269@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1270@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1271This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1272by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1273command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1274output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1275input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1276specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1277follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1278behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1279
1280This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1281libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1282mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1283their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1284required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1285the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1286dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1287symbols.
1288
252b5132
RH
1289@cindex cross reference table
1290@kindex --cref
1291@item --cref
1292Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1293generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1294Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1295
1296The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1297easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1298sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1299symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1300definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1301where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1302symbol are listed.
252b5132 1303
4818e05f
AM
1304@cindex common allocation
1305@kindex --no-define-common
1306@item --no-define-common
1307This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1308The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1309@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1310
1311The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1312the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1313of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1314forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1315Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1316from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1317This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1318and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1319duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1320paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1321
252b5132 1322@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1323@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1324@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1325Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1326address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1327times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1328limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1329context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1330symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1331constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1332using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1333Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1334space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1335@var{expression}.
1336
1337@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1338@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1339@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1340@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1341@itemx --no-demangle
1342These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1343and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1344present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1345underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1346mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1347different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1348to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1349demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1350is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1351
1352@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1353@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1354@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1355@item -I@var{file}
1356@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1357Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1358generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1359linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1360doing.
1361
7ce691ae 1362@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1363@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1364@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1365@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1366Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1367with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1368
252b5132
RH
1369@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1370@item --force-exe-suffix
1371Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1372
1373If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1374@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1375the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1376option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1377Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1378it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1379
1380@kindex --gc-sections
1381@kindex --no-gc-sections
1382@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1383@item --gc-sections
1384@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1385Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1386targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1387performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1388@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1389
d5465ba2
AM
1390@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1391examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1392symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1393command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1394referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1395libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1396referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1397the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1398relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1399
ac69cbc6 1400This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1401@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1402specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1403a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1404
c17d87de
NC
1405@kindex --print-gc-sections
1406@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1407@cindex garbage collection
1408@item --print-gc-sections
1409@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1410List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1411printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1412collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1413default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1414be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1415line.
1416
30824704
RM
1417@kindex --print-output-format
1418@cindex output format
1419@item --print-output-format
1420Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1421other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1422in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1423
252b5132
RH
1424@cindex help
1425@cindex usage
1426@kindex --help
1427@item --help
1428Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1429
ea20a7da
CC
1430@kindex --target-help
1431@item --target-help
1432Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1433
2509a395
SL
1434@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1435@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1436Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1437@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1438
1439@cindex memory usage
1440@kindex --no-keep-memory
1441@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1442@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1443symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1444instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1445necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1446while linking a large executable.
1447
1448@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1449@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1450@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1451@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1452Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1453is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1454The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1455behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1456libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1457
aa713662
L
1458@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1459@kindex -z muldefs
1460@item --allow-multiple-definition
1461@itemx -z muldefs
1462Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1463report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1464first definition will be used.
1465
b79e8c78 1466@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1467@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1468@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1469@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1470Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1471This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1472determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1473shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1474how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1475
903249d7
NC
1476The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1477referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1478an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1479a shared library.
1480
1481The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1482libraries specified at link time are that:
1483
1484@itemize @bullet
1485@item
1486A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1487that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1488resolvable at load time.
1489@item
1490There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1491symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1492
1493The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1494select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1495architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1496appropriate memset function.
1497@end itemize
b79e8c78 1498
31941635
L
1499@kindex --no-undefined-version
1500@item --no-undefined-version
1501Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1502it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1503will be issued instead.
1504
3e3b46e5
PB
1505@kindex --default-symver
1506@item --default-symver
1507Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1508exported symbols.
1509
1510@kindex --default-imported-symver
1511@item --default-imported-symver
1512Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1513imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1514
252b5132
RH
1515@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1516@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1517Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1518files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1519been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1520This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1521errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1522have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1523inappropriate.
1524
fe7929ce
AM
1525@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1526@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1527Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1528library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1529
252b5132
RH
1530@kindex --no-whole-archive
1531@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1532Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1533archive files.
1534
1535@cindex output file after errors
1536@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1537@item --noinhibit-exec
1538Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1539Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1540errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1541when it issues any error whatsoever.
1542
0a9c1c8e
CD
1543@kindex -nostdlib
1544@item -nostdlib
1545Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1546command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1547(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1548
252b5132 1549@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1550@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1551@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1552@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1553file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1554@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1555object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1556object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1557should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1558usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1559name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1560list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1561command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1562this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1563@end ifclear
1564
36af4a4e
JJ
1565@kindex -pie
1566@kindex --pic-executable
1567@item -pie
1568@itemx --pic-executable
1569@cindex position independent executables
1570Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1571ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1572libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1573address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1574normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1575defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1576
252b5132
RH
1577@kindex -qmagic
1578@item -qmagic
1579This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1580
1581@kindex -Qy
1582@item -Qy
1583This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1584
1585@kindex --relax
1586@cindex synthesizing linker
1587@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1588@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1589@item --relax
28d5f677 1590@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1591An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1592@ifset GENERIC
1593This option is only supported on a few targets.
1594@end ifset
1595@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1596@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1597@end ifset
1598@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1599@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1600@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1601@ifset XTENSA
1602@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1603@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1604@ifset M68HC11
1605@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1606@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1607@ifset POWERPC
1608@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1609@end ifset
252b5132 1610
28d5f677
NC
1611On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1612global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1613addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1614synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1615instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1616
1617On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1618debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1619@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1620This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1621family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1622@end ifset
1623
1624@ifset GENERIC
1625On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1626but ignored.
1627@end ifset
1628
28d5f677
NC
1629On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1630@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1631
252b5132
RH
1632@cindex retaining specified symbols
1633@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1634@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1635@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1636@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1637Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1638discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1639symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1640@ifset GENERIC
1641(such as VxWorks)
1642@end ifset
1643where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1644run-time memory.
1645
1646@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1647or symbols needed for relocations.
1648
1649You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1650line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1651
1652@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1653@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1654@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1655@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1656Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1657linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1658arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1659them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1660also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1661objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1662@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1663ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1664@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1665
ff5dcc92 1666The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1667SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1668@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1669runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1670options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1671gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1672file systems.
252b5132 1673
ff5dcc92 1674For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1675followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1676the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1677@end ifset
1678
1679@ifset GENERIC
1680@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1681@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1682@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1683When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1684happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1685of the input files.
1686
1687When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1688non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1689shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1690explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1691specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1692@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1693either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1694appearing multiple times.
1695
28c309a2
NC
1696This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1697that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1698is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1699runtime linker would do.
1700
252b5132 1701The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1702libraries:
252b5132
RH
1703@enumerate
1704@item
ff5dcc92 1705Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1706@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1707Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1708between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1709specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1710used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1711at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1712by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1713the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1714@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1715On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1716@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1717environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1718@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1719On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1720directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1721@item
a1b8d843 1722For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1723variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1724@item
ec4eb78a
L
1725For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1726@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1727libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1728@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1729@item
252b5132
RH
1730The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1731@item
1732For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1733exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1734@end enumerate
1735
1736If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1737warning and continue with the link.
1738@end ifset
1739
1740@kindex -shared
1741@kindex -Bshareable
1742@item -shared
1743@itemx -Bshareable
1744@cindex shared libraries
1745Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1746and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1747shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1748undefined symbols in the link.
1749
252b5132 1750@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1751@item --sort-common
1752@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1753@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1754This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1755ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1756sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1757eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1758between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1759specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1760
2509a395
SL
1761@kindex --sort-section=name
1762@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1763This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1764patterns in the linker script.
1765
2509a395
SL
1766@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1767@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1768This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1769patterns in the linker script.
1770
252b5132 1771@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1772@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1773Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1774each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1775size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1776
1777@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1778@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1779Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1780output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1781This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1782certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1783cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1784that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1785support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1786input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1787more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1788many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1789
1790@kindex --stats
1791@item --stats
1792Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1793as execution time and memory usage.
1794
2509a395 1795@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1796@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1797Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1798configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1799that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1800
252b5132
RH
1801@kindex --traditional-format
1802@cindex traditional format
1803@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1804For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1805the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1806use the traditional format instead.
1807
1808@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1809For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1810symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1811full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1812@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1813trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1814combine duplicate entries.
1815
2509a395
SL
1816@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1817@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1818Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1819address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1820times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1821line.
1822@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1823for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1824@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1825should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1826sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1827
2509a395
SL
1828@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1829@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1830@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1831@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1832@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1833@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1834@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1835Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1836@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1837
2509a395
SL
1838@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1839@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1840@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1841When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1842of the first byte of the text segment.
1843
9d5777a3
RM
1844@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1845@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1846@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1847When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1848the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1849text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1850
0d705e9f
AM
1851@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1852@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
1853@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
1854When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
1855model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
1856
560e09e9
NC
1857@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1858@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1859Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1860values for @samp{method}:
1861
1862@table @samp
1863@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1864Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1865
1866@item report-all
da8bce14 1867Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1868
1869@item ignore-in-object-files
1870Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1871ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1872
1873@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1874Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1875ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1876when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1877libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1878command line.
1879@end table
1880
1881The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1882by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1883
1884Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1885unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1886can change this to a warning.
1887
1715a13c
L
1888@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1889@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1890@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1891@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1892Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1893supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1894the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1895argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1896
1897@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1898@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1899@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1900Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1901used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1902about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1903is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1904see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1905use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1906symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1907@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1908
7ce691ae 1909@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1910@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1911@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1912@item --warn-common
1913Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 1914a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
1915but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1916you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 1917Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1918warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1919
1920There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1921
1922@table @samp
1923@item int i = 1;
1924A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1925file.
1926
1927@item extern int i;
1928An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1929There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1930variable somewhere.
1931
1932@item int i;
1933A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1934variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1935The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1936single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1937size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1938a definition of the same variable.
1939@end table
1940
1941The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1942Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1943just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1944encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1945a common symbol.
1946
1947@enumerate
1948@item
1949Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1950definition for the symbol.
1951@smallexample
1952@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1953 overridden by definition
1954@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1955@end smallexample
1956
1957@item
1958Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1959the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1960except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1961@smallexample
1962@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1963 overriding common
1964@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1965@end smallexample
1966
1967@item
1968Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1969@smallexample
1970@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1971 of `@var{symbol}'
1972@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1973@end smallexample
1974
1975@item
1976Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1977@smallexample
1978@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1979 overridden by larger common
1980@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1981@end smallexample
1982
1983@item
1984Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1985the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1986encountered in a different order.
1987@smallexample
1988@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1989 overriding smaller common
1990@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1991@end smallexample
1992@end enumerate
1993
1994@kindex --warn-constructors
1995@item --warn-constructors
1996Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1997object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1998detect the use of global constructors.
1999
2000@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2001@item --warn-multiple-gp
2002Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2003This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2004Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2005section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2006of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2007base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2008base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2009bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2010large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2011values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2012option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2013
2014@kindex --warn-once
2015@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2016@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2017@item --warn-once
2018Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2019which refers to it.
2020
2021@kindex --warn-section-align
2022@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2023@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2024@item --warn-section-align
2025Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2026alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2027The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2028is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2029the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2030
8fdd7217
NC
2031@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2032@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2033Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2034
a0c402a5
L
2035@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2036@item --warn-alternate-em
2037Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2038
560e09e9
NC
2039@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2040@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2041If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2042@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2043This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2044
2045@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2046@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2047This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2048it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2049
252b5132
RH
2050@kindex --whole-archive
2051@cindex including an entire archive
2052@item --whole-archive
2053For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2054@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2055in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2056files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2057library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2058library. This option may be used more than once.
2059
7ec229ce 2060Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2061about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2062Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2063list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2064your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2065
2509a395
SL
2066@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2067@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2068Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2069@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2070undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2071@var{symbol}.
2072
2073This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2074wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2075wishes to call the system function, it should call
2076@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2077
2078Here is a trivial example:
2079
2080@smallexample
2081void *
cc2f008e 2082__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2083@{
cc2f008e 2084 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2085 return __real_malloc (c);
2086@}
2087@end smallexample
2088
ff5dcc92 2089If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2090all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2091instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2092call the real @code{malloc} function.
2093
2094You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2095links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2096you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2097file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2098call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2099
6aa29e7b
JJ
2100@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2101@item --eh-frame-hdr
2102Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2103@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2104
e41b3a13
JJ
2105@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2106@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2107Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2108generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2109if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2110
6c1439be
L
2111@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2112@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2113@item --enable-new-dtags
2114@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2115This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2116systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2117@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2118and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2119If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2120created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2121those options are only available for ELF systems.
2122
2d643429 2123@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2124@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2125Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2126close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2127time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2128increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2129value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2130
fdc90cb4
JJ
2131@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2132@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2133Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2134@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2135new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2136the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2137hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2138
35835446
JR
2139@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2140@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2141This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2142linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2143for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2144about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2145
4f9c04f7 2146Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21471021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2148run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2149has been used.
2150
2151The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2152enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2153
c0065db7
RM
2154@kindex --build-id
2155@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2156@item --build-id
2157@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2158Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2159The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2160file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2161@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2162parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2163@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2164@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2165an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2166characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2167omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2168
2169The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2170that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2171unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2172to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2173file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2174string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2175
2176Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2177@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2178@end table
2179
0285c67d
NC
2180@c man end
2181
36f63dca 2182@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2183
0285c67d
NC
2184@c man begin OPTIONS
2185
ff5dcc92 2186The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2187the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2188normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2189use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2190@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2191like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2192symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2193object file).
2194
2195In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2196support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2197PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2198values by either a space or an equals sign.
2199
ff5dcc92 2200@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2201
2202@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2203@item --add-stdcall-alias
2204If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2205as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2206[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2207
2208@kindex --base-file
2209@item --base-file @var{file}
2210Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2211addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2212@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2213[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2214
2215@kindex --dll
2216@item --dll
2217Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2218@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2219file.
bb10df36 2220[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2221
88183869
DK
2222@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2223@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2224@item --enable-long-section-names
2225@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2226The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2227the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2228for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2229fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2230to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2231allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2232disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2233generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2234as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2235with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2236GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2237information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2238option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2239section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2240when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2241image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2242[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2243
252b5132
RH
2244@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2245@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2246@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2247@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2248If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2249do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2250only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2251resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2252undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2253@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2254to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2255warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2256import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2257to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2258feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2259@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2260mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2261[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2262
522f09cd
KT
2263@kindex --leading-underscore
2264@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2265@item --leading-underscore
2266@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2267For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2268in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2269disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2270
252b5132
RH
2271@cindex DLLs, creating
2272@kindex --export-all-symbols
2273@item --export-all-symbols
2274If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2275be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2276otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2277explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2278attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2279option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2280@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2281@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2282exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2283re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2284such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2285@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2286@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2287Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2288not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2289extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2290(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2291These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2292@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2293@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2294@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2295@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2296[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2297
2298@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2299@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2300Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2301exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2302[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2303
2927aaca
NC
2304@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2305@item --exclude-all-symbols
2306Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2307[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2308
252b5132
RH
2309@kindex --file-alignment
2310@item --file-alignment
2311Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2312file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2313512.
bb10df36 2314[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2315
2316@cindex heap size
2317@kindex --heap
2318@item --heap @var{reserve}
2319@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2320Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2321to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2322committed.
bb10df36 2323[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2324
2325@cindex image base
2326@kindex --image-base
2327@item --image-base @var{value}
2328Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2329the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2330is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2331your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2332other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2333for dlls.
bb10df36 2334[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2335
2336@kindex --kill-at
2337@item --kill-at
2338If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2339symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2340[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2341
26d2d8a2
BF
2342@kindex --large-address-aware
2343@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2344If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2345header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2346greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2347or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2348section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2349[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2350
252b5132
RH
2351@kindex --major-image-version
2352@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2353Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2354[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2355
2356@kindex --major-os-version
2357@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2358Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2359[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2360
2361@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2362@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2363Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2364[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2365
2366@kindex --minor-image-version
2367@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2368Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2369[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2370
2371@kindex --minor-os-version
2372@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2373Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2374[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2375
2376@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2377@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2378Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2379[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2380
2381@cindex DEF files, creating
2382@cindex DLLs, creating
2383@kindex --output-def
2384@item --output-def @var{file}
2385The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2386file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2387(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2388library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2389automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2390[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2391
b044cda1
CW
2392@cindex DLLs, creating
2393@kindex --out-implib
2394@item --out-implib @var{file}
2395The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2396import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2397import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2398may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2399makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2400creation step.
bb10df36 2401[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2402
2403@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2404@item --enable-auto-image-base
2405Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2406using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2407from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2408collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2409avoided.
bb10df36 2410[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2411
2412@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2413@item --disable-auto-image-base
2414Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2415user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2416default.
bb10df36 2417[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2418
2419@cindex DLLs, linking to
2420@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2421@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2422When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2423search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2424@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2425between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2426uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2427@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2428[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2429
2430@kindex --enable-auto-import
2431@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2432Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2433DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2434building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2435'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2436to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2437specification published by Microsoft.
2438
e2a83dd0
NC
2439Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2440data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2441placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2442around a problem with consts that is described here:
2443http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2444
4d8907ac
DS
2445Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2446see this message:
0d888aac 2447
ece2d90e 2448"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2449documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2450
ece2d90e
NC
2451This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2452ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2453allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2454fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2455constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2456multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2457this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2458of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2459the warning, and exit.
2460
2461There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2462data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2463
2fa9fc65
NC
2464One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2465of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2466this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2467
c0065db7
RM
2468A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2469that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2470there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2471a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2472
2473@example
2474extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2475extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2476 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2477@end example
2478
2479or
2480
2481@example
2482extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2483extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2484 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2485@end example
2486
c0065db7 2487For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2488is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2489
2490@example
2491extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2492extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2493 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2494@end example
2495
c406afaf
NC
2496or
2497
2498@example
2499extern long long extern_ll;
2500extern_ll -->
2501 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2502@end example
2503
2fa9fc65 2504A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2505'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2506@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2507requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2508building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2509merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2510between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2511constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2512
2513Original:
2514@example
2515--foo.h
2516extern int arr[];
2517--foo.c
2518#include "foo.h"
2519void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2520 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2521@}
2522@end example
2523
2524Solution 1:
2525@example
2526--foo.h
2527extern int arr[];
2528--foo.c
2529#include "foo.h"
2530void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2531 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2532 volatile int *parr = arr;
2533 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2534@}
2535@end example
2536
2537Solution 2:
2538@example
2539--foo.h
2540/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2541#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2542 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2543#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2544#else
2545#define FOO_IMPORT
2546#endif
2547extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2548--foo.c
2549#include "foo.h"
2550void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2551 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2552@}
2553@end example
2554
c0065db7 2555A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2556library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2557for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2558functions).
bb10df36 2559[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2560
2561@kindex --disable-auto-import
2562@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2563Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2564@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2565[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2566
2fa9fc65
NC
2567@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2568@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2569If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2570that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2571a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2572environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2573[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2574
2575@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2576@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2577Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2578DLLs.
bb10df36 2579[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2580
b044cda1
CW
2581@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2582@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2583Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2584[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2585
252b5132
RH
2586@kindex --section-alignment
2587@item --section-alignment
2588Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2589addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2590[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2591
2592@cindex stack size
2593@kindex --stack
2594@item --stack @var{reserve}
2595@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2596Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2597to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2598committed.
bb10df36 2599[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2600
2601@kindex --subsystem
2602@item --subsystem @var{which}
2603@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2604@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2605Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2606legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2607@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2608the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2609@var{which}.
bb10df36 2610[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2611
2f563b51
DK
2612The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2613of the PE file header:
2614[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2615
2616@kindex --dynamicbase
2617@item --dynamicbase
2618The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2619randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2620Vista for i386 PE targets.
2621
2622@kindex --forceinteg
2623@item --forceinteg
2624Code integrity checks are enforced.
2625
2626@kindex --nxcompat
2627@item --nxcompat
2628The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2629This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2630
2631@kindex --no-isolation
2632@item --no-isolation
2633Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2634
2635@kindex --no-seh
2636@item --no-seh
2637The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2638this image.
2639
2640@kindex --no-bind
2641@item --no-bind
2642Do not bind this image.
2643
2644@kindex --wdmdriver
2645@item --wdmdriver
2646The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2647
2f563b51
DK
2648@kindex --tsaware
2649@item --tsaware
2650The image is Terminal Server aware.
2651
252b5132
RH
2652@end table
2653
0285c67d
NC
2654@c man end
2655
ac145307
BS
2656@ifset C6X
2657@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2658
2659@c man begin OPTIONS
2660
2661The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2662libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2663all executables use an index of 0.
2664
2665@table @gcctabopt
2666
2667@kindex --dsbt-size
2668@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
2669This option sets the number of entires in the DSBT of the current executable
2670or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2671entries.
2672
2673@kindex --dsbt-index
2674@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2675This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2676to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2677executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2678@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2679
fbd9ad90
PB
2680@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2681The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2682exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2683
ac145307
BS
2684@end table
2685
2686@c man end
2687@end ifset
2688
93fd0973
SC
2689@ifset M68HC11
2690@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2691
2692@c man begin OPTIONS
2693
2694The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2695memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2696
2697@table @gcctabopt
2698
2699@kindex --no-trampoline
2700@item --no-trampoline
2701This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2702is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2703instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2704
2705@kindex --bank-window
2706@item --bank-window @var{name}
2707This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2708the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2709The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2710paging and addresses within the memory window.
2711
2712@end table
2713
2714@c man end
2715@end ifset
2716
7fb9f789
NC
2717@ifset M68K
2718@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2719
2720@c man begin OPTIONS
2721
2722The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2723when linking for 68K targets.
2724
2725@table @gcctabopt
2726
2727@kindex --got
2728@item --got=@var{type}
2729This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2730@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2731@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2732Info entry for @file{ld}.
2733
2734@end table
2735
2736@c man end
2737@end ifset
2738
833794fc
MR
2739@ifset MIPS
2740@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2741
2742@c man begin OPTIONS
2743
2744The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2745generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2746
2747@table @gcctabopt
2748
2749@kindex --insn32
2750@item --insn32
2751@kindex --no-insn32
2752@itemx --no-insn32
2753These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2754generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2755or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
275632-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2757used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2758possible.
2759
2760@end table
2761
2762@c man end
2763@end ifset
2764
252b5132
RH
2765@ifset UsesEnvVars
2766@node Environment
2767@section Environment Variables
2768
0285c67d
NC
2769@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2770
560e09e9 2771You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2772@ifclear SingleFormat
2773@code{GNUTARGET},
2774@end ifclear
2775@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2776
36f63dca 2777@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2778@kindex GNUTARGET
2779@cindex default input format
2780@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2781use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2782of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2783@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2784of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2785attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2786this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2787there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2788object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2789BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2790in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2791@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2792
2793@kindex LDEMULATION
2794@cindex default emulation
2795@cindex emulation, default
2796@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2797@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2798behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2799available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2800the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2801variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2802linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2803
2804@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2805@cindex demangling, default
2806Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2807@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2808default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2809a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2810may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2811options.
2812
0285c67d
NC
2813@c man end
2814@end ifset
2815
252b5132
RH
2816@node Scripts
2817@chapter Linker Scripts
2818
2819@cindex scripts
2820@cindex linker scripts
2821@cindex command files
2822Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2823written in the linker command language.
2824
2825The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2826the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2827the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2828more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2829direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2830described below.
2831
2832The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2833yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2834linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2835to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2836such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2837
2838You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2839line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2840default linker script.
2841
2842You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2843to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2844Linker Scripts}.
2845
2846@menu
2847* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2848* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2849* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2850* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2851* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2852* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2853* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2854* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2855* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2856* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2857* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2858@end menu
2859
2860@node Basic Script Concepts
2861@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2862@cindex linker script concepts
2863We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2864describe the linker script language.
2865
2866The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2867file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2868@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2869The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2870purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2871among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2872section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2873in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2874
2875Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2876also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 2877contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
2878the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2879A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2880area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2881loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2882which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2883of debugging information.
2884
2885Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2886first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2887the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2888@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2889section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2890same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2891is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2892(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2893based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2894RAM address would be the VMA.
2895
2896You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2897program with the @samp{-h} option.
2898
2899Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2900@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2901has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2902information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2903will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2904static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2905referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2906
2907You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2908program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2909option.
2910
2911@node Script Format
2912@section Linker Script Format
2913@cindex linker script format
2914Linker scripts are text files.
2915
2916You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2917either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2918symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2919generally ignored.
2920
2921Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2922If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2923otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2924double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2925file name.
2926
2927You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2928@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2929to whitespace.
2930
2931@node Simple Example
2932@section Simple Linker Script Example
2933@cindex linker script example
2934@cindex example of linker script
2935Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2936
2937The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2938@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2939memory layout of the output file.
2940
2941The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2942describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2943code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2944@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2945Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2946your input files.
2947
2948For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
29490x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2950linker script which will do that:
2951@smallexample
2952SECTIONS
2953@{
2954 . = 0x10000;
2955 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2956 . = 0x8000000;
2957 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2958 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2959@}
2960@end smallexample
2961
2962You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2963followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2964descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2965
252b5132
RH
2966The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2967sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2968counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2969other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2970current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2971incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2972@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2973
2974The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2975required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2976after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2977which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2978wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2979means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2980
2981Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2982@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2983@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2984
2985The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2986the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2987at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2988output section, the value of the location counter will be
2989@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2990effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2991immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2992
2993The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2994alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2995example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2996sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2997may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2998sections.
2999
3000That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3001
3002@node Simple Commands
3003@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3004@cindex linker script simple commands
3005In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3006
3007@menu
3008* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3009* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3010@ifclear SingleFormat
3011* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3012@end ifclear
3013
4a93e180 3014* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3015* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3016@end menu
3017
3018@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3019@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3020@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3021@cindex start of execution
3022@cindex first instruction
3023@cindex entry point
3024The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3025point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3026entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3027@smallexample
3028ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3029@end smallexample
3030
3031There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3032entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3033stopping when one of them succeeds:
3034@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3035@item
252b5132 3036the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3037@item
252b5132 3038the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3039@item
3ab904c4
NC
3040the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3041targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3042check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3043@item
252b5132 3044the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3045@item
252b5132
RH
3046The address @code{0}.
3047@end itemize
3048
3049@node File Commands
36f63dca 3050@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3051@cindex linker script file commands
3052Several linker script commands deal with files.
3053
3054@table @code
3055@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3056@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3057@cindex including a linker script
3058Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3059be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3060with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
306110 levels deep.
3062
4006703d
NS
3063You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3064@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3065
252b5132
RH
3066@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3067@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3068@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3069@cindex input files in linker scripts
3070@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3071@cindex linker script input object files
3072The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3073in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3074
3075For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3076a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3077then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3078
3079In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3080script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3081
e3f2db7f
AO
3082In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3083with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3084located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3085for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3086open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3087linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
3088description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3089
ff5dcc92 3090If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3091name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3092@samp{-l}.
3093
3094When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3095files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3096script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3097
3098@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3099@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3100@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3101@cindex grouping input files
3102The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3103files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3104new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3105in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3106
b717d30e
JJ
3107@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3108@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3109@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3110This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3111commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3112as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3113with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3114when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3115@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3116and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3117setting afterwards.
3118
252b5132
RH
3119@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3120@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3121@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3122The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3123@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3124@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3125Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3126precedence.
3127
3128You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3129output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3130
3131@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3132@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3133@cindex library search path in linker script
3134@cindex archive search path in linker script
3135@cindex search path in linker script
3136The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3137@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3138@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3139on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3140are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3141the command line option are searched first.
3142
3143@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3144@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3145@cindex first input file
3146The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3147that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3148though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3149when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3150first file.
3151@end table
3152
3153@ifclear SingleFormat
3154@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3155@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3156A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3157
3158@table @code
3159@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3160@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3161@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3162@cindex output file format in linker script
3163The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3164output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3165exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3166(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3167line option takes precedence.
3168
3169You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3170formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3171This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3172desired endianness.
3173
3174If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3175will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3176output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3177used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3178
3179For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3180command:
3181@smallexample
3182OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3183@end smallexample
3184This says that the default format for the output file is
3185@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3186option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3187format.
3188
3189@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3190@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3191@cindex input file format in linker script
3192The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3193files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3194This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3195(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3196is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3197command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3198@end table
3199@end ifclear
3200
4a93e180
NC
3201@node REGION_ALIAS
3202@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3203@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3204@cindex region alias
3205@cindex region names
3206
3207Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3208@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3209
3210@smallexample
3211REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3212@end smallexample
3213
3214The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3215memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3216to memory regions. An example follows.
3217
3218Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3219memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3220that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3221non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3222access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3223read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3224sections:
3225
3226@itemize @bullet
3227@item
3228@code{.text} program code;
3229@item
3230@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3231@item
3232@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3233@item
3234@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3235@end itemize
3236
3237The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3238part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3239output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3240systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3241@code{C}:
3242@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3243@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3244@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3245@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3246@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3247@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3248@end multitable
3249The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3250loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3251the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3252the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3253
3254The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3255includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3256memory layout:
3257@smallexample
3258INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3259
3260SECTIONS
3261 @{
3262 .text :
3263 @{
3264 *(.text)
3265 @} > REGION_TEXT
3266 .rodata :
3267 @{
3268 *(.rodata)
3269 rodata_end = .;
3270 @} > REGION_RODATA
3271 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3272 @{
3273 data_start = .;
3274 *(.data)
3275 @} > REGION_DATA
3276 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3277 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3278 .bss :
3279 @{
3280 *(.bss)
3281 @} > REGION_BSS
3282 @}
3283@end smallexample
3284
3285Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3286regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3287variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3288@table @code
3289@item A
3290Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3291@smallexample
3292MEMORY
3293 @{
3294 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3295 @}
3296
3297REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3298REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3299REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3300REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3301@end smallexample
3302@item B
3303Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3304into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3305@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3306@smallexample
3307MEMORY
3308 @{
3309 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3310 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3311 @}
3312
3313REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3314REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3315REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3316REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3317@end smallexample
3318@item C
3319Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3320@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3321initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3322system start into the @code{RAM}.
3323@smallexample
3324MEMORY
3325 @{
3326 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3327 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3328 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3329 @}
3330
3331REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3332REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3333REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3334REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3335@end smallexample
3336@end table
3337
3338It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3339@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3340necessary:
3341@smallexample
3342#include <string.h>
3343
3344extern char data_start [];
3345extern char data_size [];
3346extern char data_load_start [];
3347
3348void copy_data(void)
3349@{
3350 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3351 @{
3352 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3353 @}
3354@}
3355@end smallexample
3356
252b5132 3357@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3358@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3359There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3360
3361@table @code
3362@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3363@kindex ASSERT
3364@cindex assertion in linker script
3365Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3366with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3367
3368@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3369@kindex EXTERN
3370@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3371Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3372symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3373modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3374each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3375command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3376
3377@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3378@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3379@cindex common allocation in linker script
3380This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3381to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3382output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3383
4818e05f
AM
3384@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3385@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3386@cindex common allocation in linker script
3387This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3388command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3389to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3390
53d25da6
AM
3391@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3392@kindex INSERT
3393@cindex insert user script into default script
3394This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3395augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3396inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3397@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3398default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3399sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3400linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3401insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3402linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3403default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3404of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3405to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3406is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3407
3408@smallexample
3409SECTIONS
3410@{
3411 OVERLAY :
3412 @{
3413 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3414 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3415 @}
3416@}
3417INSERT AFTER .text;
3418@end smallexample
3419
252b5132
RH
3420@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3421@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3422@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3423This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3424references among certain output sections.
3425
3426In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3427using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3428will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3429errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3430a function defined in the other section.
3431
3432The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3433@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3434an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3435@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3436names.
3437
3438@ifclear SingleFormat
3439@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3440@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3441@cindex machine architecture
3442@cindex architecture
3443Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3444of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3445architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3446the @samp{-f} option.
3447@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3448
3449@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3450@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3451This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3452@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3453in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3454@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3455@end table
3456
3457@node Assignments
3458@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3459@cindex assignment in scripts
3460@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3461@cindex variables, defining
3462You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3463the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3464
3465@menu
3466* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3467* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3468* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3469* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3470* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3471@end menu
3472
3473@node Simple Assignments
3474@subsection Simple Assignments
3475
3476You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3477
3478@table @code
3479@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3480@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3481@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3482@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3483@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3484@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3485@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3486@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3487@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3488@end table
3489
3490The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3491@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3492defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3493
3494The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3495may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3496
3497The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3498
3499Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3500
3501You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3502statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3503section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3504
3505The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3506expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3507
3508Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3509assignments may be used:
3510
3511@smallexample
3512floating_point = 0;
3513SECTIONS
3514@{
3515 .text :
3516 @{
3517 *(.text)
3518 _etext = .;
3519 @}
156e34dd 3520 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3521 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3522@}
3523@end smallexample
3524@noindent
3525In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3526zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3527the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3528defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3529upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3530
eb8476a6
MR
3531@node HIDDEN
3532@subsection HIDDEN
3533@cindex HIDDEN
3534For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3535exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3536
3537Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3538@code{HIDDEN}:
3539
3540@smallexample
3541HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3542SECTIONS
3543@{
3544 .text :
3545 @{
3546 *(.text)
3547 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3548 @}
3549 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3550 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3551@}
3552@end smallexample
3553@noindent
3554In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3555
252b5132
RH
3556@node PROVIDE
3557@subsection PROVIDE
3558@cindex PROVIDE
3559In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3560only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3561the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3562@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3563@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3564@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3565@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3566@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3567
3568Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3569@smallexample
3570SECTIONS
3571@{
3572 .text :
3573 @{
3574 *(.text)
3575 _etext = .;
3576 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3577 @}
3578@}
3579@end smallexample
3580
3581In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3582underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3583the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3584underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3585If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3586linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3587
7af8e998
L
3588@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3589@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3590@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3591Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3592hidden and won't be exported.
3593
73ae6183
NC
3594@node Source Code Reference
3595@subsection Source Code Reference
3596
3597Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3598intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3599a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3600symbol that does not have a value.
3601
3602Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3603transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3604stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3605prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3606mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3607of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3608variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3609linker script variable might be referred to as:
3610
3611@smallexample
3612 extern int foo;
3613@end smallexample
3614
3615But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3616
3617@smallexample
3618 _foo = 1000;
3619@end smallexample
3620
3621In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3622transformation has taken place.
3623
3624When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3625things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3626in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3627second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3628table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3629contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3630value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3631
3632@smallexample
3633 int foo = 1000;
3634@end smallexample
3635
10bf6894 3636creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3637holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3638number 1000 is initially stored.
3639
3640When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3641first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3642memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3643So:
3644
3645@smallexample
3646 foo = 1;
3647@end smallexample
3648
3649looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3650associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3651address. Whereas:
3652
3653@smallexample
3654 int * a = & foo;
3655@end smallexample
3656
10bf6894 3657looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3658and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3659the variable @samp{a}.
3660
3661Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3662the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3663an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3664
3665@smallexample
3666 foo = 1000;
3667@end smallexample
3668
3669creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3670the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3671address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3672linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3673access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3674
3675Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3676you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3677use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3678section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3679linker script contains these declarations:
3680
3681@smallexample
3682@group
3683 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3684 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3685 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3686@end group
3687@end smallexample
3688
3689Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3690
3691@smallexample
3692@group
3693 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3694
73ae6183
NC
3695 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3696@end group
3697@end smallexample
3698
3699Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3700
252b5132 3701@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3702@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3703@kindex SECTIONS
3704The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3705into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3706
3707The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3708@smallexample
3709SECTIONS
3710@{
3711 @var{sections-command}
3712 @var{sections-command}
3713 @dots{}
3714@}
3715@end smallexample
3716
3717Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3718
3719@itemize @bullet
3720@item
3721an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3722@item
3723a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3724@item
3725an output section description
3726@item
3727an overlay description
3728@end itemize
3729
3730The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3731@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3732those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3733understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3734the layout of the output file.
3735
3736Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3737below.
3738
3739If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3740linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3741section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3742input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3743example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3744in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3745
3746@menu
3747* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3748* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3749* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3750* Input Section:: Input section description
3751* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3752* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3753* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3754* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3755* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3756@end menu
3757
3758@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3759@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3760The full description of an output section looks like this:
3761@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3762@group
7e7d5768 3763@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3764 [AT(@var{lma})]
3765 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3766 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3767 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3768 @{
3769 @var{output-section-command}
3770 @var{output-section-command}
3771 @dots{}
562d3460 3772 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3773@end group
3774@end smallexample
3775
3776Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3777
3778The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3779name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3780The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3781
3782Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3783
3784@itemize @bullet
3785@item
3786a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3787@item
3788an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3789@item
3790data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3791@item
3792a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3793@end itemize
3794
3795@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3796@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3797@cindex name, section
3798@cindex section name
3799The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3800meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3801support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3802must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3803example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3804output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3805names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3806quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3807characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3808commas must be quoted.
3809
3810The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3811Discarding}.
3812
3813@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3814@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3815@cindex address, section
3816@cindex section address
3817The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3818address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3819is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3820
3821If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3822section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3823to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3824alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3825contained within the output section.
3826
3827The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3828
3829@itemize @bullet
3830@item
3831If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3832is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3833in that region.
3834
3835@item
3836If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3837regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3838section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3839be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3840
3841@item
3842If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3843the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3844counter.
3845@end itemize
3846
3847@noindent
3848For example:
3849
252b5132
RH
3850@smallexample
3851.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3852@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3853
252b5132
RH
3854@noindent
3855and
ea5cae92 3856
252b5132
RH
3857@smallexample
3858.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3859@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3860
252b5132
RH
3861@noindent
3862are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3863@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3864counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3865counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3866input sections.
252b5132
RH
3867
3868The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3869For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3870so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3871do something like this:
3872@smallexample
3873.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3874@end smallexample
3875@noindent
3876This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3877aligned upward to the specified value.
3878
3879Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3880location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3881sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3882
3883@node Input Section
36f63dca 3884@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3885@cindex input sections
3886@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3887The most common output section command is an input section description.
3888
3889The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3890You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3891in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3892map the input files into your memory layout.
3893
3894@menu
3895* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3896* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3897* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3898* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3899* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3900@end menu
3901
3902@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3903@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3904@cindex input section basics
3905An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3906by a list of section names in parentheses.
3907
3908The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3909describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3910
3911The most common input section description is to include all input
3912sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3913include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3914@smallexample
3915*(.text)
3916@end smallexample
3917@noindent
18625d54
CM
3918Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3919of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3920match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3921example:
252b5132 3922@smallexample
b4346c09 3923*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3924@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3925will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3926@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3927
3928There are two ways to include more than one section:
3929@smallexample
3930*(.text .rdata)
3931*(.text) *(.rdata)
3932@end smallexample
3933@noindent
3934The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3935@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3936first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3937they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3938@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3939@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3940
3941You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3942You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3943needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3944@smallexample
3945data.o(.data)
3946@end smallexample
3947
ae17ab41
CM
3948To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
3949of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
3950
3951Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
3952
3953@smallexample
3954@group
3955SECTIONS @{
3956 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
3957 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
3958@}
3959@end group
3960@end smallexample
3961
3962In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
3963input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
3964@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
3965@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
3966whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
3967
967928e9
AM
3968You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3969matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3970with no whitespace around the colon.
3971
3972@table @samp
3973@item archive:file
3974matches file within archive
3975@item archive:
3976matches the whole archive
3977@item :file
3978matches file but not one in an archive
3979@end table
3980
3981Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3982wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3983single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3984@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3985within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3986also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3987other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3988from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3989command.
3990
252b5132
RH
3991If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3992the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3993commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3994@smallexample
3995data.o
3996@end smallexample
3997
967928e9
AM
3998When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3999and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4000characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4001name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4002did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4003though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4004@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4005the archive search path.
4006
4007@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4008@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4009@cindex input section wildcards
4010@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4011@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4012@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4013In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4014name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4015
4016The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4017pattern for the file name.
4018
4019The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4020
4021@table @samp
4022@item *
4023matches any number of characters
4024@item ?
4025matches any single character
4026@item [@var{chars}]
4027matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4028character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4029@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4030@item \
4031quotes the following character
4032@end table
4033
4034When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4035will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4036Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4037exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4038@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4039a @samp{/} character.
4040
4041File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4042specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4043does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4044
4045If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4046appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4047will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4048sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4049@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4050@smallexample
4051.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4052.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4053@end smallexample
4054
bcaa7b3e 4055@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4056Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4057in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4058this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4059pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4060@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4061into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4062
bcaa7b3e
L
4063@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4064@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4065difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4066descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4067Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4068reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4069
02ecc8e9
L
4070@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4071@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4072difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4073ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4074encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4075
bcaa7b3e
L
4076@cindex SORT
4077@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4078
4079When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4080can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4081
4082@enumerate
4083@item
4084@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4085It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4086sections have the same name.
4087@item
4088@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4089It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4090sections have the same alignment.
4091@item
c0065db7 4092@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4093treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4094@item
4095@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4096is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4097@item
4098All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4099@end enumerate
4100
4101When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4102section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4103takes precedence over the command line option.
4104
4105If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4106command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4107treated as nested sorting command.
4108
4109@enumerate
4110@item
4111@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4112@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4113@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4114@item
4115@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4116@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4117@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4118@end enumerate
4119
4120If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4121command line option will be ignored.
4122
eda680f8
L
4123@cindex SORT_NONE
4124@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4125section sorting option.
4126
252b5132
RH
4127If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4128@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4129precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4130
4131This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4132files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4133sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4134The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4135with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4136linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4137@smallexample
4138@group
4139SECTIONS @{
4140 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4141 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4142 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4143 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4144@}
4145@end group
4146@end smallexample
4147
4148@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4149@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4150@cindex common symbol placement
4151@cindex uninitialized data placement
4152A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4153file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4154linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4155named @samp{COMMON}.
4156
4157You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4158other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4159particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4160input files are placed in another section.
4161
4162In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4163@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4164@smallexample
4165.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4166@end smallexample
4167
4168@cindex scommon section
4169@cindex small common symbols
4170Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4171example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4172symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4173different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4174the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4175symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4176to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4177locations.
4178
4179@cindex [COMMON]
4180You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4181notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4182@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4183
4184@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4185@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4186@cindex KEEP
4187@cindex garbage collection
4188When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4189it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4190This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4191with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4192@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4193
4194@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4195@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4196The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4197to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4198start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4199@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4200follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4201@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4202@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4203All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4204files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4205
4206@smallexample
4207@group
4208SECTIONS @{
4209 outputa 0x10000 :
4210 @{
4211 all.o
4212 foo.o (.input1)
4213 @}
36f63dca
NC
4214@end group
4215@group
252b5132
RH
4216 outputb :
4217 @{
4218 foo.o (.input2)
4219 foo1.o (.input1)
4220 @}
36f63dca
NC
4221@end group
4222@group
252b5132
RH
4223 outputc :
4224 @{
4225 *(.input1)
4226 *(.input2)
4227 @}
4228@}
4229@end group
a1ab1d2a 4230@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4231
4232@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4233@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4234@cindex data
4235@cindex section data
4236@cindex output section data
4237@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4238@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4239@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4240@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4241@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4242You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4243@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4244an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4245parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4246value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4247counter.
4248
4249The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4250store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4251bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4252stored.
4253
4254For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4255of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4256@smallexample
4257BYTE(1)
4258LONG(addr)
4259@end smallexample
4260
4261When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4262same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4263target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4264@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4265@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4266
4267If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4268which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4269When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4270true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4271endianness of the first input object file.
4272
36f63dca 4273Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4274between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4275@smallexample
4276SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4277@end smallexample
4278whereas this will work:
4279@smallexample
4280SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4281@end smallexample
4282
252b5132
RH
4283@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4284@cindex holes, filling
4285@cindex unspecified memory
4286You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4287current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4288otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4289gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4290with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4291necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4292point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4293than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4294different parts of an output section.
4295
4296This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4297value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4298@smallexample
563e308f 4299FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4300@end smallexample
4301
4302The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4303section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4304part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4305entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4306precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4307expression.
252b5132
RH
4308
4309@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4310@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4311There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4312commands.
4313
4314@table @code
4315@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4316@cindex input filename symbols
4317@cindex filename symbols
4318@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4319The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4320The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4321file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4322the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4323
4324This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4325normally used for any other object file format.
4326
4327@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4328@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4329@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4330@item CONSTRUCTORS
4331When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4332unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4333destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4334arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4335automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4336For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4337linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4338@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4339ignored for other object file formats.
4340
4341The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4342constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4343Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4344the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4345first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4346of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4347compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4348formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4349@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4350the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4351destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4352@code{exit}.
4353
4354For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4355arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4356addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4357and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4358linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4359runtime code expects to see.
4360
4361@smallexample
4362 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4363 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4364 *(.ctors)
4365 LONG(0)
4366 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4367 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4368 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4369 *(.dtors)
4370 LONG(0)
4371 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4372@end smallexample
4373
4374If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4375which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4376are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4377are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4378command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4379@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4380@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4381@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4382
4383Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4384and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4385need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4386scripts.
4387
4388@end table
4389
4390@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4391@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4392@cindex discarding sections
4393@cindex sections, discarding
4394@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4395The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4396for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4397be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4398@smallexample
49c13adb 4399.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4400@end smallexample
4401@noindent
4402will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4403@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4404sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4405space in an output section will also create the output section.
4406
a0976ea4 4407The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4408on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4409symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4410the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4411section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4412
4413@cindex /DISCARD/
4414The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4415input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4416section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4417
4418@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4419@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4420@cindex output section attributes
4421We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4422like this:
0c71d759 4423
252b5132 4424@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4425@group
7e7d5768 4426@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4427 [AT(@var{lma})]
4428 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4429 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4430 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4431 @{
4432 @var{output-section-command}
4433 @var{output-section-command}
4434 @dots{}
562d3460 4435 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4436@end group
4437@end smallexample
0c71d759 4438
252b5132
RH
4439We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4440@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4441remaining section attributes.
4442
a1ab1d2a 4443@menu
252b5132
RH
4444* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4445* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4446* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4447* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4448* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4449* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4450* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4451* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4452@end menu
4453
4454@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4455@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4456Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4457parentheses. The following types are defined:
4458
4459@table @code
4460@item NOLOAD
4461The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4462loaded into memory when the program is run.
4463@item DSECT
4464@itemx COPY
4465@itemx INFO
4466@itemx OVERLAY
4467These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4468rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4469marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4470section when the program is run.
4471@end table
4472
4473@kindex NOLOAD
4474@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4475@cindex loading, preventing
4476The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4477the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4478the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4479@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4480need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4481@smallexample
4482@group
4483SECTIONS @{
4484 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4485 @dots{}
4486@}
4487@end group
4488@end smallexample
4489
4490@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4491@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4492@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4493@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4494@cindex load address
4495@cindex section load address
4496Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4497@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4498@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4499specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4500address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4501
ea5cae92
NC
4502The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4503specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4504takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4505load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4506region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4507
4508If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4509section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4510load address:
4511
4512@itemize @bullet
4513@item
4514If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4515the LMA address as well.
4516
4517@item
4518If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4519
4520@item
4521Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4522with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4523section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4524VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4525the last section in the located region.
4526
4527@item
4528If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4529that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4530
4531@item
4532If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4533section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4534@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4535
4536@cindex ROM initialized data
4537@cindex initialized data in ROM
4538This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4539example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4540called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4541@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4542even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4543uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4544defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4545counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4546
4547@smallexample
4548@group
4549SECTIONS
4550 @{
4551 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4552 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4553 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4554 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4555 .bss 0x3000 :
4556 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4557@}
4558@end group
4559@end smallexample
4560
4561The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4562this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4563the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4564how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4565script.
4566
4567@smallexample
4568@group
4569extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4570char *src = &_etext;
4571char *dst = &_data;
4572
ea5cae92
NC
4573/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4574while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4575 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4576
ea5cae92 4577/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4578for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4579 *dst = 0;
4580@end group
4581@end smallexample
4582
bbf115d3
L
4583@node Forced Output Alignment
4584@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4585@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4586@cindex forcing output section alignment
4587@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4588You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4589
7e7d5768
AM
4590@node Forced Input Alignment
4591@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4592@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4593@cindex forcing input section alignment
4594@cindex input section alignment
4595You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4596SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4597sections, whether larger or smaller.
4598
0c71d759
NC
4599@node Output Section Constraint
4600@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4601@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4602@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4603@cindex constraints on output sections
4604You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4605of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4606read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4607@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4608
252b5132 4609@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4610@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4611@kindex >@var{region}
4612@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4613@cindex memory regions and sections
4614You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4615using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4616
4617Here is a simple example:
4618@smallexample
4619@group
4620MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4621SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4622@end group
4623@end smallexample
4624
4625@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4626@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4627@kindex :@var{phdr}
4628@cindex section, assigning to program header
4629@cindex program headers and sections
4630You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4631using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4632one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4633assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4634@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4635linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4636
4637Here is a simple example:
4638@smallexample
4639@group
4640PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4641SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4642@end group
4643@end smallexample
4644
4645@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4646@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4647@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4648@cindex section fill pattern
4649@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4650You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4651@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4652(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4653within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4654alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4655necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4656of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4657an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4658fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4659other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4660pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4661expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4662
4663You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4664output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4665
4666Here is a simple example:
4667@smallexample
4668@group
563e308f 4669SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4670@end group
4671@end smallexample
4672
4673@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4674@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4675@kindex OVERLAY
4676@cindex overlays
4677An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4678are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4679the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4680copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4681required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4682can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4683than another.
4684
4685Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4686@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4687output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4688command is as follows:
4689@smallexample
4690@group
4691OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4692 @{
4693 @var{secname1}
4694 @{
4695 @var{output-section-command}
4696 @var{output-section-command}
4697 @dots{}
4698 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4699 @var{secname2}
4700 @{
4701 @var{output-section-command}
4702 @var{output-section-command}
4703 @dots{}
4704 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4705 @dots{}
4706 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4707@end group
4708@end smallexample
4709
4710Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4711section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4712section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4713those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4714except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4715sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4716
4717The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4718addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4719memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4720whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4721and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4722and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4723
56dd11f0
NC
4724If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4725references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4726the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4727sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4728@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4729
4730For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4731provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4732defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4733@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4734the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4735within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4736symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4737
4738At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4739the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4740
4741Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4742@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4743@smallexample
4744@group
4745 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4746 @{
4747 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4748 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4749 @}
4750@end group
4751@end smallexample
4752@noindent
4753This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4754address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4755@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4756following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4757@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4758@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4759
4760C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4761like the following.
4762
4763@smallexample
4764@group
4765 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4766 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4767 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4768@end group
4769@end smallexample
4770
4771Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4772everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4773example could have been written identically as follows.
4774
4775@smallexample
4776@group
4777 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4778 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4779 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4780 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4781 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4782 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4783 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4784@end group
4785@end smallexample
4786
4787@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4788@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4789@kindex MEMORY
4790@cindex memory regions
4791@cindex regions of memory
4792@cindex allocating memory
4793@cindex discontinuous memory
4794The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4795memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4796
4797The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4798memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4799may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4800can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4801set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4802regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4803around to fit into the available regions.
4804
4805A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4806command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4807you wish. The syntax is:
4808@smallexample
4809@group
a1ab1d2a 4810MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4811 @{
4812 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4813 @dots{}
4814 @}
4815@end group
4816@end smallexample
4817
4818The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4819region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4820Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4821with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4822must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4823add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 4824command.
252b5132
RH
4825
4826@cindex memory region attributes
4827The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4828whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4829not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4830@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4831section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4832the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4833them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4834
4835The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4836@table @samp
4837@item R
4838Read-only section
4839@item W
4840Read/write section
4841@item X
4842Executable section
4843@item A
4844Allocatable section
4845@item I
4846Initialized section
4847@item L
4848Same as @samp{I}
4849@item !
c09e9a8c 4850Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4851@end table
4852
4853If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4854@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4855attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4856in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4857attributes.
4858
4859@kindex ORIGIN =
4860@kindex o =
4861@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4862The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4863the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4864cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4865abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4866@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4867
4868@kindex LENGTH =
4869@kindex len =
4870@kindex l =
4871The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4872region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4873be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4874@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4875
4876In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4877available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4878and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4879linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4880is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4881or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4882explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4883region.
4884
4885@smallexample
4886@group
a1ab1d2a 4887MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4888 @{
4889 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4890 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4891 @}
4892@end group
4893@end smallexample
4894
4895Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4896specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4897@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4898a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4899output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4900was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4901the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4902output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4903region, the linker will issue an error message.
4904
3ec57632 4905It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4906expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4907@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4908
4909@smallexample
4910@group
c0065db7 4911 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4912@end group
4913@end smallexample
4914
252b5132
RH
4915@node PHDRS
4916@section PHDRS Command
4917@kindex PHDRS
4918@cindex program headers
4919@cindex ELF program headers
4920@cindex program segments
4921@cindex segments, ELF
4922The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4923@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4924loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4925program with the @samp{-p} option.
4926
4927When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4928reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4929program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4930This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4931interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4932
4933The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4934in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4935precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4936the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4937not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4938
4939The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4940generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4941ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4942
4943This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4944@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4945
4946@smallexample
4947@group
4948PHDRS
4949@{
4950 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4951 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4952@}
4953@end group
4954@end smallexample
4955
4956The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4957of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4958header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4959with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4960must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4961is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4962
4963Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4964system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4965specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4966sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4967attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4968Section Phdr}.
4969
4970It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4971merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4972repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4973contain the section.
4974
4975If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4976then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4977not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4978convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4979placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4980default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4981segment at all.
4982
4983@kindex FILEHDR
4984@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4985You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4986the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4987The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4988file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4989include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4990segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4991these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4992
4993The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4994value of the keyword.
4995
4996@table @asis
4997@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4998Indicates an unused program header.
4999
5000@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5001Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5002the file.
5003
5004@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5005Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5006
5007@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5008Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5009found.
5010
5011@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5012Indicates a segment holding note information.
5013
5014@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5015A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5016ABI.
5017
5018@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5019Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5020
5021@item @var{expression}
5022An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5023be used for types not defined above.
5024@end table
5025
5026You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5027in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5028@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5029Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5030output section attribute.
5031
5032The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5033which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5034explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5035an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5036header.
5037
5038Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5039headers used on a native ELF system.
5040
5041@example
5042@group
5043PHDRS
5044@{
5045 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5046 interp PT_INTERP ;
5047 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5048 data PT_LOAD ;
5049 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5050@}
5051
5052SECTIONS
5053@{
5054 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5055 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5056 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5057 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5058 @dots{}
5059 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5060 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5061 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5062 @dots{}
5063@}
5064@end group
5065@end example
5066
5067@node VERSION
5068@section VERSION Command
5069@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5070@cindex symbol versions
5071@cindex version script
5072@cindex versions of symbols
5073The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5074only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5075symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5076a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5077shared library.
5078
5079You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5080you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5081also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5082
5083The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5084@smallexample
5085VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5086@end smallexample
5087
5088The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5089Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5090version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5091version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5092version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5093scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5094library.
5095
5096The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5097examples.
5098
5099@smallexample
5100VERS_1.1 @{
5101 global:
5102 foo1;
5103 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5104 old*;
5105 original*;
5106 new*;
252b5132
RH
5107@};
5108
5109VERS_1.2 @{
5110 foo2;
5111@} VERS_1.1;
5112
5113VERS_2.0 @{
5114 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5115 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5116 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5117 "f(int, double)";
5118 @};
252b5132
RH
5119@} VERS_1.2;
5120@end smallexample
5121
5122This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5123version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5124The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5125a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5126of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5127symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5128is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5129in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5130However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5131name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5132
5133Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5134depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5135to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5136
5137Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5138depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5139and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5140
5141When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5142specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5143unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5144unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5145somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5146wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5147wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5148set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5149ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5150
5151The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5152they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5153could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5154However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5155
0f6bf451 5156Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5157in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5158symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5159won't.
5160
5161@smallexample
7c9c73be 5162@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5163@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5164
252b5132
RH
5165When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5166symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5167requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5168shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5169loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5170linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5171application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5172way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5173all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5174search for each symbol reference.
5175
5176The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5177doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5178that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5179functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5180the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5181required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5182that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5183versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5184the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5185
5186There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5187first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5188source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5189script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5190maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5191@smallexample
5192__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5193@end smallexample
5194@noindent
5195in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5196be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5197The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5198@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5199takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5200
5201The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5202function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5203an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5204version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5205linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5206
5207To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5208source file. Here is an example:
5209
5210@smallexample
5211__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5212__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5213__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5214__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5215@end smallexample
5216
5217In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5218unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5219example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5220@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5221
5222When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5223some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5224this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5225@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5226declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5227you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5228
5229If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5230within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5231(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5232specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5233
cb840a31
L
5234You can also specify the language in the version script:
5235
5236@smallexample
5237VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5238@end smallexample
5239
c0065db7 5240The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5241The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5242demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5243patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5244@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5245
86043bbb
MM
5246Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5247described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5248or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5249the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5250whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5251cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5252might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5253should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5254expect when you upgrade.
5255
252b5132
RH
5256@node Expressions
5257@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5258@cindex expressions
5259@cindex arithmetic
5260The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5261that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5262expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5263host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5264
5265You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5266
5267The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5268expressions.
5269
5270@menu
5271* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5272* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5273* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5274* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5275* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5276* Operators:: Operators
5277* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5278* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5279* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5280@end menu
5281
5282@node Constants
5283@subsection Constants
5284@cindex integer notation
5285@cindex constants in linker scripts
5286All constants are integers.
5287
5288As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5289octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5290hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5291@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5292@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5293value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5294
5295@cindex scaled integers
5296@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5297@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5298@cindex suffixes for integers
5299@cindex integer suffixes
5300In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5301constant by
5302@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5303@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5304@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5305@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5306@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5307@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5308@tex
5309${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5310@end tex
5311@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5312respectively. For example, the following
5313all refer to the same quantity:
5314
252b5132 5315@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5316_fourk_1 = 4K;
5317_fourk_2 = 4096;
5318_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5319_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5320@end smallexample
5321
8a308ae8
NC
5322Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5323conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5324
0c71d759
NC
5325@node Symbolic Constants
5326@subsection Symbolic Constants
5327@cindex symbolic constants
5328@kindex CONSTANT
5329It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5330the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5331
5332@table @code
5333@item MAXPAGESIZE
5334@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5335The target's maximum page size.
5336
5337@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5338@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5339The target's default page size.
5340@end table
5341
5342So for example:
5343
5344@smallexample
9d5777a3 5345 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5346@end smallexample
5347
5348will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5349supported by the target.
5350
252b5132
RH
5351@node Symbols
5352@subsection Symbol Names
5353@cindex symbol names
5354@cindex names
5355@cindex quoted symbol names
5356@kindex "
5357Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5358and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5359Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5360specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5361keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5362@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5363"SECTION" = 9;
5364"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5365@end smallexample
5366
5367Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5368to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5369whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5370
ecca9871
L
5371@node Orphan Sections
5372@subsection Orphan Sections
5373@cindex orphan
5374Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5375are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5376script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5377output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5378placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5379attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5380same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5381If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5382at the end of the file.
5383
5384For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5385well as section flag.
5386
41911f68 5387If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5388the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5389__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5390section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5391orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5392representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5393character.
5394
252b5132
RH
5395@node Location Counter
5396@subsection The Location Counter
5397@kindex .
5398@cindex dot
5399@cindex location counter
5400@cindex current output location
5401The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5402current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5403location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5404within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5405anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5406
5407@cindex holes
5408Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5409moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5410location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5411and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5412doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5413
5414@smallexample
5415SECTIONS
5416@{
5417 output :
5418 @{
5419 file1(.text)
5420 . = . + 1000;
5421 file2(.text)
5422 . += 1000;
5423 file3(.text)
563e308f 5424 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5425@}
5426@end smallexample
5427@noindent
5428In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5429located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5430followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5431@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5432@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5433specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5434
5c6bbab8
NC
5435@cindex dot inside sections
5436Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5437current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5438statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5439absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5440however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5441not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5442
5443@smallexample
5444SECTIONS
5445@{
5446 . = 0x100
5447 .text: @{
5448 *(.text)
5449 . = 0x200
5450 @}
5451 . = 0x500
5452 .data: @{
5453 *(.data)
5454 . += 0x600
5455 @}
5456@}
5457@end smallexample
5458
5459The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5460and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5461the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5462much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5463move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5464and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5465the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5466the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5467
b5666f2f
AM
5468@cindex dot outside sections
5469Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5470output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5471needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5472
5473@smallexample
5474SECTIONS
5475@{
5476 start_of_text = . ;
5477 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5478 end_of_text = . ;
5479
5480 start_of_data = . ;
5481 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5482 end_of_data = . ;
5483@}
5484@end smallexample
5485
5486If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5487not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5488between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5489should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5490blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5491the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5492sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5493statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5494special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5495place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5496as follows:
5497
5498@smallexample
5499SECTIONS
5500@{
5501 start_of_text = . ;
5502 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5503 end_of_text = . ;
5504
5505 start_of_data = . ;
5506 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5507 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5508 end_of_data = . ;
5509@}
5510@end smallexample
5511
5512This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5513@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5514placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5515assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5516a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5517section. So you could write:
5518
5519@smallexample
5520SECTIONS
5521@{
5522 start_of_text = . ;
5523 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5524 end_of_text = . ;
5525
5526 . = . ;
5527 start_of_data = . ;
5528 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5529 end_of_data = . ;
5530@}
5531@end smallexample
5532
5533Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5534@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5535
252b5132
RH
5536@need 2000
5537@node Operators
5538@subsection Operators
5539@cindex operators for arithmetic
5540@cindex arithmetic operators
5541@cindex precedence in expressions
5542The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5543the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5544@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5545@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5546@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5547@smallexample
5548precedence associativity Operators Notes
5549(highest)
55501 left ! - ~ (1)
55512 left * / %
55523 left + -
55534 left >> <<
55545 left == != > < <= >=
55556 left &
55567 left |
55578 left &&
55589 left ||
555910 right ? :
556011 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5561(lowest)
5562@end smallexample
5563Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5564(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5565(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5566@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5567@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5568@tex
5569\vskip \baselineskip
5570%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5571\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5572\hrule
5573\halign
5574{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5575height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5576&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5577height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5578\noalign{\hrule}
5579height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5580&highest&&&&&\cr
5581% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5582&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5583&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5584&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5585&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5586&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5587&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5588&7&&left&&|&\cr
5589&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5590&9&&left&&||&\cr
5591&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5592&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5593&lowest&&&&&\cr
5594height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5595\hrule}
5596@end tex
5597@iftex
5598{
5599@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5600@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5601@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5602}
5603@end iftex
5604@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5605
5606@node Evaluation
5607@subsection Evaluation
5608@cindex lazy evaluation
5609@cindex expression evaluation order
5610The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5611an expression when absolutely necessary.
5612
5613The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5614address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5615regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5616as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5617
5618However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5619until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5620other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5621for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5622
5623The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5624assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5625allocation.
5626
5627Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5628@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5629
5630If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5631available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5632following
5633@smallexample
5634@group
5635SECTIONS
5636 @{
a1ab1d2a 5637 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5638 @{ *(.text) @}
5639 @}
5640@end group
5641@end smallexample
5642@noindent
5643will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5644address}.
5645
5646@node Expression Section
5647@subsection The Section of an Expression
5648@cindex expression sections
5649@cindex absolute expressions
5650@cindex relative expressions
5651@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5652@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5653@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5654Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5655relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5656using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5657value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5658symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5659operations.
5660
abf4be64
AM
5661Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5662section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5663address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5664@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5665functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5666One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5667(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5668differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5669versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5670section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5671Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5672absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5673given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5674everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5675
5676In the following simple example,
252b5132 5677
7542af2a
AM
5678@smallexample
5679@group
5680SECTIONS
5681 @{
5682 . = 0x100;
5683 __executable_start = 0x100;
5684 .data :
5685 @{
5686 . = 0x10;
5687 __data_start = 0x10;
5688 *(.data)
5689 @}
5690 @dots{}
5691 @}
5692@end group
5693@end smallexample
252b5132 5694
7542af2a
AM
5695both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5696address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5697@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5698section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5699
5c3049d2
AM
5700For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5701addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5702
5703@itemize @bullet
5704@item
c05f749e
AM
5705Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5706operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5707absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5708@item
7542af2a
AM
5709Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5710relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5711and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5712@item
c05f749e
AM
5713Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5714in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5715address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5716before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5717@end itemize
5718
5719The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5720
5721@itemize @bullet
5722@item
5723An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5724@item
5725The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5726@item
9bc8bb33 5727The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5728relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5729(after above conversions) is also a number.
5730@item
5731The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5732relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5733section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5734@item
5735The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5736conversions) is an absolute address.
5737@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5738
5739You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5740to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5741create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5742section @samp{.data}:
5743@smallexample
5744SECTIONS
5745 @{
5746 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5747 @}
5748@end smallexample
5749@noindent
5750If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5751@samp{.data} section.
5752
7542af2a
AM
5753Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5754particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5755
252b5132
RH
5756@node Builtin Functions
5757@subsection Builtin Functions
5758@cindex functions in expressions
5759The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5760use in linker script expressions.
5761
5762@table @code
5763@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5764@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5765@cindex expression, absolute
5766Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5767of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5768value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5769normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5770
5771@item ADDR(@var{section})
5772@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5773@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5774Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5775script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5776the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5777@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5778@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5779the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5780@smallexample
5781@group
5782SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5783 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5784 @{
252b5132
RH
5785 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5786 @dots{}
5787 @}
5788 .output :
5789 @{
5790 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5791 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5792 @}
5793@dots{} @}
5794@end group
5795@end smallexample
5796
876f4090
NS
5797@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5798@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5799@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5800@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5801@cindex round up location counter
5802@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5803@cindex round up expression
5804@cindex align expression
5805Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5806to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5807doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5808arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5809expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5810equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5811
5812Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5813next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5814variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5815input sections:
252b5132
RH
5816@smallexample
5817@group
5818SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5819 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5820 *(.data)
5821 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5822 @}
5823@dots{} @}
5824@end group
5825@end smallexample
5826@noindent
5827The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5828a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5829a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5830of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5831
5832The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5833
362c1d1a
NS
5834@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5835@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5836@cindex section alignment
5837Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5838been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5839evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5840the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5841value in that section.
5842@smallexample
5843@group
5844SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5845 .output @{
5846 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5847 @dots{}
5848 @}
5849@dots{} @}
5850@end group
5851@end smallexample
5852
252b5132
RH
5853@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5854@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5855This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5856scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5857section.
5858
2d20f7bf
JJ
5859@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5860@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5861This is equivalent to either
5862@smallexample
5863(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5864@end smallexample
5865or
5866@smallexample
5867(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5868@end smallexample
5869@noindent
5870depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5871for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5872@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5873If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5874memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5875bytes in the on-disk file.
5876
5877This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5878any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5879@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5880be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5881working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5882
5883@noindent
5884Example:
5885@smallexample
5886 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5887@end smallexample
5888
5889@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5890@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5891This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5892evaluation purposes.
5893
5894@smallexample
5895 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5896@end smallexample
5897
a4f5ad88
JJ
5898@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5899@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5900This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5901@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5902When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5903does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5904@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5905boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5906it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5907@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5908
5909@smallexample
5910 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5911@end smallexample
5912
252b5132
RH
5913@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5914@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5915@cindex symbol defaults
5916Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5917defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5918return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5919default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5920shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5921the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5922existed, its value is preserved:
5923
5924@smallexample
5925@group
5926SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5927 .text : @{
5928 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5929 @dots{}
5930 @}
5931 @dots{}
5932@}
5933@end group
5934@end smallexample
5935
3ec57632
NC
5936@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5937@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5938Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5939
252b5132
RH
5940@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5941@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5942@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5943Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5944Section LMA}).
5945
5946@kindex MAX
5947@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5948Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5949
5950@kindex MIN
5951@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5952Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5953
5954@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5955@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5956@cindex unallocated address, next
5957Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5958This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5959use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5960output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5961
3ec57632
NC
5962@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5963@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5964Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5965
ba916c8a
MM
5966@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5967@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5968Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
5969value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
5970@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
5971will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
5972can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5973``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5974name.
5975
252b5132
RH
5976@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5977@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5978@cindex section size
5979Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5980been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5981evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5982@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5983@smallexample
5984@group
5985SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5986 .output @{
5987 .start = . ;
5988 @dots{}
5989 .end = . ;
5990 @}
5991 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5992 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5993@dots{} @}
5994@end group
5995@end smallexample
5996
5997@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5998@itemx sizeof_headers
5999@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6000@cindex header size
6001Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6002information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6003this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6004choose, to facilitate paging.
6005
6006@cindex not enough room for program headers
6007@cindex program headers, not enough room
6008When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6009@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6010number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6011addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6012additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6013room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6014the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6015script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6016you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6017command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6018@end table
6019
6020@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6021@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6022@cindex implicit linker scripts
6023If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6024an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6025linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6026linker will report an error.
6027
6028An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6029
6030Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6031assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6032commands.
6033
6034Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6035at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6036read. This can affect archive searching.
6037
6038@ifset GENERIC
6039@node Machine Dependent
6040@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6041
6042@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6043@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6044sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6045functionality are not listed.
6046
6047@menu
36f63dca
NC
6048@ifset H8300
6049* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6050@end ifset
6051@ifset I960
6052* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6053@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6054@ifset M68HC11
6055* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6056@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6057@ifset ARM
6058* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6059@end ifset
6060@ifset HPPA
6061* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6062@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6063@ifset M68K
6064* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6065@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6066@ifset MIPS
6067* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6068@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6069@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6070* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6071@end ifset
2469cfa2 6072@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6073* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6074@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6075@ifset POWERPC
6076* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6077@end ifset
6078@ifset POWERPC64
6079* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6080@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6081@ifset SPU
6082* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6083@end ifset
74459f0e 6084@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6085* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6086@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6087@ifset WIN32
6088* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6089@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6090@ifset XTENSA
6091* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6092@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6093@end menu
6094@end ifset
6095
252b5132
RH
6096@ifset H8300
6097@ifclear GENERIC
6098@raisesections
6099@end ifclear
6100
6101@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6102@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6103
6104@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6105For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6106you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6107
6108@table @emph
6109@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6110@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6111@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6112targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6113program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6114respectively.
6115
6116@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6117@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6118@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6119@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6120sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6121page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6122(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6123@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6124top page of memory).
1502569c 6125
81f5558e
NC
6126@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6127indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6128displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6129the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6130@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6131whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6132range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6133
1502569c 6134@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6135@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6136biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6137which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6138page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6139(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6140@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6141the top page of memory).
6142
6143@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6144@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
614532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6146changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6147(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6148@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6149the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6150@end table
6151
6152@ifclear GENERIC
6153@lowersections
6154@end ifclear
6155@end ifset
6156
36f63dca 6157@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6158@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6159@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6160@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6161@node Renesas
6162@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6163
c2dcd04e
NC
6164@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6165H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6166options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6167@end ifset
6168@end ifclear
6169
6170@ifset I960
6171@ifclear GENERIC
6172@raisesections
6173@end ifclear
6174
6175@node i960
6176@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6177
6178@cindex i960 support
6179
6180You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6181specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6182family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6183incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6184linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6185libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6186search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6187
6188For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6189well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6190paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6191the names
6192
6193@smallexample
6194@group
6195try
6196libtry.a
6197tryca
6198libtryca.a
6199@end group
6200@end smallexample
6201
6202@noindent
6203The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6204two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6205
6206You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6207the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6208use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6209specifies a library.
6210
6211@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6212@cindex relaxing on i960
6213@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6214you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6215@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6216them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6217instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6218instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6219target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6220not itself call any subroutines).
6221
48229727
JB
6222@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6223@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6224@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6225The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6226
6227The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6228
85fdf906
AH
6229@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6230@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6231The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6232
36f63dca
NC
6233@ifclear GENERIC
6234@lowersections
6235@end ifclear
6236@end ifset
6237
6238@ifset ARM
6239@ifclear GENERIC
6240@raisesections
6241@end ifclear
6242
93fd0973
SC
6243@ifset M68HC11
6244@ifclear GENERIC
6245@raisesections
6246@end ifclear
6247
6248@node M68HC11/68HC12
6249@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6250
6251@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6252
6253@subsection Linker Relaxation
6254
6255For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6256optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6257
6258@table @emph
6259@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6260@item relaxing address modes
6261@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6262targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6263program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6264respectively.
6265
6266@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6267transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6268page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6269
6270@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6271When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6272of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6273addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6274@code{bset} instructions.
6275
6276@end table
6277
6278@subsection Trampoline Generation
6279
6280@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6281@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6282For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6283call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6284will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6285trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6286case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6287point to the function trampoline.
6288
6289@ifclear GENERIC
6290@lowersections
6291@end ifclear
6292@end ifset
6293
36f63dca 6294@node ARM
3674e28a 6295@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6296
6297@cindex ARM interworking support
6298@kindex --support-old-code
6299For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6300between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6301been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6302line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6303libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6304option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6305given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6306which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6307the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6308non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6309
6310@cindex thumb entry point
6311@cindex entry point, thumb
6312@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6313The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6314@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6315But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6316branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6317executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6318
ce11ba6c
KT
6319@cindex PE import table prefixing
6320@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6321The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6322the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6323element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6324import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6325
e489d0ae
PB
6326@cindex BE8
6327@kindex --be8
6328The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6329executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6330The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6331
3674e28a
PB
6332@cindex TARGET1
6333@kindex --target1-rel
6334@kindex --target1-abs
6335The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6336@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6337or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6338and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6339
6340@cindex TARGET2
6341@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6342The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6343@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6344meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6345@table @samp
6346@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6347@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6348@item abs
6349@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6350@item got-rel
6351@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6352@end table
6353
319850b4
JB
6354@cindex FIX_V4BX
6355@kindex --fix-v4bx
6356The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6357specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6358interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6359also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6360
6361In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6362linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6363@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6364
6365In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6366relocations are ignored.
6367
845b51d6
PB
6368@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6369@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6370Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6371relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6372
6373@smallexample
6374TST rM, #1
6375MOVEQ PC, rM
6376BX Rn
6377@end smallexample
6378
6379This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6380and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6381condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6382
33bfe774
JB
6383@cindex USE_BLX
6384@kindex --use-blx
6385The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6386BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6387situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6388code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6389each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6390
6391This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6392specify it if you are using that target.
6393
c6dd86c6
JB
6394@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6395@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6396The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6397bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6398instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6399to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6400the support code can read the intended values.
6401
6402The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6403intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6404and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6405intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6406full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6407you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6408
6409If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6410enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6411@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6412mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6413vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6414@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6415
6416If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6417potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6418such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6419first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6420instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6421the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6422are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6423
2de70689
MGD
6424@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6425@kindex --fix-arm1176
6426@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6427The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6428in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6429are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6430unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6431
9d5777a3 6432Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6433Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6434http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6435
bf21ed78
MS
6436@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6437@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6438The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6439warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6440enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6441linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6442using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6443not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6444
6445@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6446@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6447The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6448warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6449@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6450linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6451using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6452
726150b7
NC
6453@cindex PIC_VENEER
6454@kindex --pic-veneer
6455The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6456ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6457is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6458@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6459
6460@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6461@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6462The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6463code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6464perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6465placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6466controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6467The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6468duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6469group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6470code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6471where they should be placed.
6472
6473The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6474@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6475placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6476branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6477placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6478value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6479exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6480A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6481linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6482from the input sections.
6483
6484The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6485@samp{N = +1}.
6486
1a51c1a4
NC
6487Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6488only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6489otherwise.
6490
36f63dca
NC
6491@ifclear GENERIC
6492@lowersections
6493@end ifclear
6494@end ifset
6495
6496@ifset HPPA
6497@ifclear GENERIC
6498@raisesections
6499@end ifclear
6500
6501@node HPPA ELF32
6502@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6503@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6504@kindex --multi-subspace
6505When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6506import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6507The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6508stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6509multiple sub-spaces.
6510
6511@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6512@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6513Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6514stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6515@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6516sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6517a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6518the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6519conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6520prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6521A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6522branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6523@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6524@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6525detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6526positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6527
6528Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6529single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6530create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6531large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6532
6533@ifclear GENERIC
6534@lowersections
6535@end ifclear
6536@end ifset
6537
7fb9f789
NC
6538@ifset M68K
6539@ifclear GENERIC
6540@raisesections
6541@end ifclear
6542
6543@node M68K
6544@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6545
6546@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6547@kindex --got=@var{type}
6548The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6549The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6550@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6551the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6552@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6553entries only at non-negative offsets.
6554@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6555entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6556support such GOTs.
6557@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6558output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6559file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6560files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6561
6562@ifclear GENERIC
6563@lowersections
6564@end ifclear
6565@end ifset
6566
833794fc
MR
6567@ifset MIPS
6568@ifclear GENERIC
6569@raisesections
6570@end ifclear
6571
6572@node MIPS
6573@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6574
6575@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6576@kindex --insn32
6577@kindex --no-insn32
6578The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6579microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6580in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6581used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6582or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6583including 16-bit ones where possible.
6584
6585@ifclear GENERIC
6586@lowersections
6587@end ifclear
6588@end ifset
6589
36f63dca
NC
6590@ifset MMIX
6591@ifclear GENERIC
6592@raisesections
6593@end ifclear
6594
6595@node MMIX
6596@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6597For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6598@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6599understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6600can translate between the two formats.
6601
6602There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6603Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6604registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6605equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6606@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6607global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6608this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6609symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6610
7a2de473
HPN
6611Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6612@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6613The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6614of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6615
6616Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6617are left out from an mmo file.
6618
6619@ifclear GENERIC
6620@lowersections
6621@end ifclear
6622@end ifset
6623
6624@ifset MSP430
6625@ifclear GENERIC
6626@raisesections
6627@end ifclear
6628
6629@node MSP430
6630@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6631For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6632will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6633just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6634
6635@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6636The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6637
6638@table @code
6639@item @samp{.vectors}
6640Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6641
6642@item @samp{.bootloader}
6643Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6644in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6645
6646@item @samp{.infomem}
6647Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6648this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6649
c0065db7 6650@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6651This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6652in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6653
6654@item @samp{.noinit}
6655Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6656
c0065db7 6657The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6658@end table
6659
6660@ifclear GENERIC
6661@lowersections
6662@end ifclear
6663@end ifset
6664
2a60a7a8
AM
6665@ifset POWERPC
6666@ifclear GENERIC
6667@raisesections
6668@end ifclear
6669
6670@node PowerPC ELF32
6671@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6672@cindex PowerPC long branches
6673@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6674Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6675displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6676@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6677@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6678the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6679section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6680section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6681@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6682both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6683considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6684
6685@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6686@table @option
6687@cindex PowerPC PLT
6688@kindex --bss-plt
6689@item --bss-plt
6690Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6691generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6692the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6693writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6694@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6695PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6696compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6697BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6698
016687f8
AM
6699@kindex --secure-plt
6700@item --secure-plt
6701@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6702@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6703when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6704layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6705style BSS PLT.
6706
2a60a7a8
AM
6707@cindex PowerPC GOT
6708@kindex --sdata-got
6709@item --sdata-got
6710The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6711sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6712@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6713section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6714@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6715@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6716@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6717@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6718PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6719pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6720GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6721really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6722
6723@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6724@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6725@item --emit-stub-syms
6726This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6727symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6728
6729@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6730@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6731@item --no-tls-optimize
6732PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6733sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6734disable the optimization.
6735@end table
6736
6737@ifclear GENERIC
6738@lowersections
6739@end ifclear
6740@end ifset
6741
6742@ifset POWERPC64
6743@ifclear GENERIC
6744@raisesections
6745@end ifclear
6746
6747@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6748@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6749
6750@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6751@table @option
6752@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6753@kindex --stub-group-size
6754@item --stub-group-size
6755Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6756by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6757@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6758sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6759a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6760the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6761conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6762prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6763A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6764branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6765@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6766@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6767detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6768positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6769
6770Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6771single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6772create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6773large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6774
6775@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6776@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6777@item --emit-stub-syms
6778This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6779symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6780
6781@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6782@kindex --dotsyms
6783@kindex --no-dotsyms
6784@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6785These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6786in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6787function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6788code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6789properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6790to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6791@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6792dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6793feature.
6794
6795@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6796@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6797@item --no-tls-optimize
6798PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6799sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6800disable the optimization.
6801
6802@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6803@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6804@item --no-opd-optimize
6805PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6806corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6807the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6808Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6809
6810@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6811@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6812@item --non-overlapping-opd
6813Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6814@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6815the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6816entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6817
6818@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6819@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6820@item --no-toc-optimize
6821PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6822entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6823reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6824marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6825marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6826relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6827unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6828reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6829discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6830reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6831code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6832optimization.
6833
6834@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6835@kindex --no-multi-toc
6836@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
6837If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
6838@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
6839where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
6840entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6841total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6842grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6843TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6844calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6845help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
684664K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6847Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
6848
6849@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
6850@kindex --no-toc-sort
6851@item --no-toc-sort
6852By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
6853happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
6854placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
6855with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
6856referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
6857@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
6858results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
6859off this feature.
6860
6861@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
6862@kindex --plt-align
6863@kindex --no-plt-align
6864@item --plt-align
6865@itemx --no-plt-align
6866Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
6867aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
6868boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. By default PLT call stubs
6869are packed tightly.
6870
6871@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
6872@kindex --plt-static-chain
6873@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
6874@item --plt-static-chain
6875@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
6876Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
6877chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
6878chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
6879
6880@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
6881@kindex --plt-thread-safe
6882@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
6883@item --plt-thread-safe
6884@itemx --no-thread-safe
6885With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
6886lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
6887another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
6888order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
6889memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
6890barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
6891looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
6892seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
6893default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
6894@end table
6895
6896@ifclear GENERIC
6897@lowersections
6898@end ifclear
6899@end ifset
6900
49fa1e15
AM
6901@ifset SPU
6902@ifclear GENERIC
6903@raisesections
6904@end ifclear
6905
6906@node SPU ELF
6907@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6908
6909@cindex SPU ELF options
6910@table @option
6911
6912@cindex SPU plugins
6913@kindex --plugin
6914@item --plugin
6915This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6916
6917@cindex SPU overlays
6918@kindex --no-overlays
6919@item --no-overlays
6920Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6921regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6922@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6923turns off all this special overlay handling.
6924
6925@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6926@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6927@item --emit-stub-syms
6928This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6929symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6930
6931@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6932@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6933@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6934This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6935function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6936on calls to non-overlay regions.
6937
6938@cindex SPU local store size
6939@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6940@item --local-store=lo:hi
6941@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6942the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6943range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6944
c0065db7 6945@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6946@kindex --stack-analysis
6947@item --stack-analysis
6948SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6949unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6950under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6951@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6952@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6953determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6954for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6955for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6956for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6957find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6958and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6959under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6960dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6961is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6962and calls will be given.
6963
c0065db7 6964@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6965@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6966@item --emit-stack-syms
6967This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6968in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6969These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6970functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6971functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6972such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6973The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6974@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6975@end table
6976
6977@ifclear GENERIC
6978@lowersections
6979@end ifclear
6980@end ifset
6981
36f63dca
NC
6982@ifset TICOFF
6983@ifclear GENERIC
6984@raisesections
6985@end ifclear
6986
6987@node TI COFF
6988@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6989@cindex TI COFF versions
6990@kindex --format=@var{version}
6991The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6992TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6993also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6994format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6995header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6996
6997@ifclear GENERIC
6998@lowersections
6999@end ifclear
7000@end ifset
7001
2ca22b03
NC
7002@ifset WIN32
7003@ifclear GENERIC
7004@raisesections
7005@end ifclear
7006
7007@node WIN32
7008@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7009
c0065db7 7010This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7011See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7012command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7013
7014@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7015@cindex import libraries
7016@item import libraries
69da35b5 7017The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7018libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7019regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7020archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7021support for creating such libraries provided with the
7022@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7023
c0065db7
RM
7024@item exporting DLL symbols
7025@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7026The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7027
7028@table @emph
7029@item using auto-export functionality
7030@cindex using auto-export functionality
7031By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7032which is controlled by the following command line options:
7033
0a5d968e
NC
7034@itemize
7035@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7036@item --exclude-symbols
7037@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7038@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7039@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7040@end itemize
7041
09e2aba4
DK
7042When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7043(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7044symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7045often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7046private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7047options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7048exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7049final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7050
7051If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7052command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7053if either of the following are true:
7054
7055@itemize
7056@item A DEF file is used.
7057@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7058@end itemize
dc8465bf 7059
c0065db7
RM
7060@item using a DEF file
7061@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7062Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7063an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7064exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7065name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7066command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7067
7068@example
7069gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7070@end example
7071
0a5d968e
NC
7072Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7073@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7074
dc8465bf
NC
7075Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7076
7077@example
4b5bd4e7 7078LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7079
7080EXPORTS
7081foo
7082bar
7083_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7084another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7085var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7086doo = foo == foo2
7087eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7088@end example
dc8465bf 7089
7fcab871 7090This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7091symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7092alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7093by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7094@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7095@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7096export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7097in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7098symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7099
6b31ad16
DS
7100The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7101name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7102the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7103
b45619c0
NC
7104When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7105library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7106@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7107executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7108
7109With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7110specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7111non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7112
7113If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7114or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7115filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7116
4b5bd4e7
DS
7117The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7118
7119@example
7120EXPORTS
7121 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7122 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7123 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7124@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7125
7126Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7127@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7128@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7129@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7130Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7131@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7132string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7133
7134The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7135
7136@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7137will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7138by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7139linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7140library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7141
7142@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7143The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7144the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7145@code{*_imp__foo}).
7146
7147@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7148well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7149read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7150variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7151the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7152extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7153application will behave unexpectedly.
7154
7155@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7156it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7157symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7158API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7159the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7160
4b5bd4e7
DS
7161See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7162other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7163
7164@cindex creating a DEF file
7165While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7166with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7167
7168@item Using decorations
7169@cindex Using decorations
7170Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7171itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7172declared as:
7173
7174@example
7175__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7176__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7177@end example
7178
7179All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7180any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7181this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7182the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7183
7184Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7185decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7186instead:
7187
7188@example
7189__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7190__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7191@end example
7192
c0065db7
RM
7193This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7194when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7195variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7196code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7197of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7198omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7199@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7200information.
c0065db7 7201@end table
dc8465bf 7202
2ca22b03
NC
7203@cindex automatic data imports
7204@item automatic data imports
7205The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7206by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7207compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7208issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7209code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7210c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7211initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7212decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7213platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7214command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7215The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7216suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7217trigger the feature's use.
7218
c0065db7 7219auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7220additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7221
c0065db7 7222"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7223documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7224
c0065db7
RM
7225The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7226occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7227One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7228below.
7229
7230@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7231For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7232object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7233offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7234field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7235in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7236without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7237The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7238references.
7239
c0065db7
RM
7240The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7241be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7242themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7243runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7244compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7245support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7246run without error on an older system.
7247
c0065db7
RM
7248@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7249enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7250
7251@cindex direct linking to a dll
7252@item direct linking to a dll
7253The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7254including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7255libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7256traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7257libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7258function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7259though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7260storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7261tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7262large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7263
c0065db7 7264Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7265@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7266of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7267perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7268select the dll instead of an import library.
7269
2ca22b03 7270
69da35b5
NC
7271For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7272to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7273
7274@example
45e948fe
NC
7275libxxx.dll.a
7276xxx.dll.a
7277libxxx.a
7278xxx.lib
69da35b5 7279cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7280libxxx.dll
7281xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7282@end example
7283
69da35b5
NC
7284before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7285
c0065db7
RM
7286(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7287where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7288@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7289file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7290@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7291
c0065db7
RM
7292Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7293@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7294was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7295various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7296could coexist on the same machine.
7297
2ca22b03
NC
7298The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7299applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7300libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7301
7302@example
7303bin/
7304 cygxxx.dll
7305lib/
7306 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7307 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7308@end example
7309
c0065db7
RM
7310Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7311done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7312
73131. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7314@example
7315gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7316@end example
2ca22b03 7317
69da35b5
NC
7318However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7319(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7320@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7321not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7322
2ca22b03
NC
73232. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7324directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7325should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7326making the app/dll.
7327
7328@example
7329ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7330@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7331
7332Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7333
7334@example
7335gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7336@end example
69da35b5
NC
7337
7338This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7339perfectly legal
7340
7341@example
7342bin/
7343 cygxxx-5.dll
7344lib/
c0065db7 7345 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7346@end example
7347
dc8465bf 7348Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7349even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7350@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7351
7352Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7353wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7354
73551. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7356work with auto-imported data.
7357
dc8465bf
NC
73582. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7359import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7360symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7361for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7362possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7363
45e948fe
NC
73643. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7365critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7366in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7367stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7368
69da35b5 7369So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7370true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7371a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7372binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7373massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7374requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7375will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7376
c0065db7 7377@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7378@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7379@item adding additional names
7380Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7381A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7382exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7383when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7384import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7385
c0065db7 7386@example
dc8465bf
NC
7387LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7388
7389EXPORTS
c0065db7 7390foo
dc8465bf 7391_foo = foo
c0065db7 7392@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7393
7394The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7395
7396Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7397source code using the "weak" attribute:
7398
c0065db7
RM
7399@example
7400void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7401void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7402@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7403
7404See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7405symbols.
7406
7407@item renaming symbols
7408Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7409kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7410@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7411DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7412created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7413
c0065db7 7414@example
dc8465bf
NC
7415LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7416
7417EXPORTS
7418_foo = foo
c0065db7 7419@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7420
7421The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7422@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7423@end table
dc8465bf 7424
0a5d968e 7425Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7426unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7427If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7428@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7429that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7430@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7431renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7432to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7433the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7434In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7435which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7436
7437@cindex weak externals
7438@item weak externals
7439The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7440weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7441defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7442are three variants of weak externals:
7443@itemize
7444@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7445called lazy externals.
7446@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7447This form is not presently implemented.
7448@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7449implemented.
7450@end itemize
7451As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7452are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7453uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7454
7455@cindex aligned common symbols
7456@item aligned common symbols
7457As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7458desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7459the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7460carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7461by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7462tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7463but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7464warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7465@end table
7466
7467@ifclear GENERIC
7468@lowersections
7469@end ifclear
7470@end ifset
7471
e0001a05
NC
7472@ifset XTENSA
7473@ifclear GENERIC
7474@raisesections
7475@end ifclear
7476
7477@node Xtensa
7478@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7479
7480@cindex Xtensa processors
7481The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7482@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7483specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7484keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7485example, with the command:
7486
7487@smallexample
7488SECTIONS
7489@{
7490 .text : @{
7491 *(.literal .text)
7492 @}
7493@}
7494@end smallexample
7495
7496@noindent
7497@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7498and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7499literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7500interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7501group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7502files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7503and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7504
43cd72b9 7505@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7506@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7507Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7508provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7509is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7510literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7511will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7512location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7513the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7514unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7515@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7516range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7517
7518For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7519to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7520instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7521instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7522instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7523@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7524hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7525By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7526switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7527density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7528instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7529performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7530linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7531a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7532
7533The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7534control the linker:
7535
7536@cindex Xtensa options
7537@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7538@item --size-opt
7539When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7540more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7541no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7542alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7543preserve the correctness of the code.
7544@end table
e0001a05
NC
7545
7546@ifclear GENERIC
7547@lowersections
7548@end ifclear
7549@end ifset
7550
252b5132
RH
7551@ifclear SingleFormat
7552@node BFD
7553@chapter BFD
7554
7555@cindex back end
7556@cindex object file management
7557@cindex object formats available
7558@kindex objdump -i
7559The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7560These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7561object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7562format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7563it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7564associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7565object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7566(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7567list all the formats available for your configuration.
7568
7569@cindex BFD requirements
7570@cindex requirements for BFD
7571As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7572several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7573BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7574formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7575been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7576BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7577may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7578
7579One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7580mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7581useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7582conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7583
7584@menu
7585* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7586@end menu
7587
7588@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7589@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7590@cindex opening object files
7591@include bfdsumm.texi
7592@end ifclear
7593
7594@node Reporting Bugs
7595@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7596@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7597@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7598
ff5dcc92 7599Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7600
7601Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7602it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7603to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7604work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7605@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7606
7607In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7608information that enables us to fix the bug.
7609
7610@menu
7611* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7612* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7613@end menu
7614
7615@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7616@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7617@cindex bug criteria
7618
7619If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7620
7621@itemize @bullet
7622@cindex fatal signal
7623@cindex linker crash
7624@cindex crash of linker
7625@item
7626If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7627@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7628
7629@cindex error on valid input
7630@item
ff5dcc92 7631If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7632
7633@cindex invalid input
7634@item
ff5dcc92 7635If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7636may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7637object files are correct.
7638
7639@item
7640If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7641improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7642@end itemize
7643
7644@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7645@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7646@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7647@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7648
7649A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7650products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7651recommend you contact that organization first.
7652
7653You can find contact information for many support companies and
7654individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7655distribution.
7656
ad22bfe8 7657@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7658Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7659@value{BUGURL}.
7660@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7661
7662The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7663@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7664fact or leave it out, state it!
7665
7666Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7667problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7668assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7669matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7670the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7671location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7672were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7673into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7674specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7675and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7676
7677Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7678the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7679on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7680
7681Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7682bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7683respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7684You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7685
7686To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7687
7688@itemize @bullet
7689@item
ff5dcc92 7690The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7691the @samp{--version} argument.
7692
7693Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7694the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7695
7696@item
ff5dcc92 7697Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7698patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7699
7700@item
7701The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7702version number.
7703
7704@item
ff5dcc92 7705What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7706``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7707
7708@item
7709The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7710observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7711list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7712sufficient.
7713
7714If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7715and then we might not encounter the bug.
7716
7717@item
7718A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7719bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7720provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7721bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7722state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7723requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7724we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7725attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7726
7727If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7728@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7729object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7730@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7731how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7732
7733@item
7734A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7735incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7736
ff5dcc92 7737Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7738will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7739not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7740a chance to make a mistake.
7741
7742Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7743say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7744copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7745C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7746and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7747fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7748you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7749any conclusion from our observations.
7750
7751@item
ff5dcc92 7752If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7753diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7754@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7755If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7756context, not by line number.
7757
7758The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7759sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7760@end itemize
7761
7762Here are some things that are not necessary:
7763
7764@itemize @bullet
7765@item
7766A description of the envelope of the bug.
7767
7768Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7769which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7770changes will not affect it.
7771
7772This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7773will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7774with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7775We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7776
7777Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7778of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7779output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7780less time, and so on.
7781
7782However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7783report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7784
7785@item
7786A patch for the bug.
7787
7788A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7789the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7790a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7791to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7792
ff5dcc92 7793Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7794construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7795through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7796able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7797fixed.
7798
7799And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7800patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7801help us to understand.
7802
7803@item
7804A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7805
7806Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7807things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7808@end itemize
7809
7810@node MRI
7811@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7812@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7813To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7814linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7815alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7816described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7817simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7818@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7819linker commands; these commands are described here.
7820
7821In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7822file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7823features to make use of them.
7824
7825You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7826@samp{-c} command-line option.
7827
7828Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7829command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7830blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7831MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7832issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7833
7834Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7835
7836You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7837lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7838The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7839
7840@table @code
7841@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7842@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7843@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7844Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7845the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7846@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7847your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7848script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7849commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7850input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7851@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7852
7853@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7854@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7855Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7856in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7857
7858@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7859
7860@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7861@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7862Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7863@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7864
7865@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7866@item BASE @var{expression}
7867Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7868absolute addresses) in the output file.
7869
7870@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7871@item CHIP @var{expression}
7872@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7873This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7874
7875@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7876@item END
7877This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7878
7879@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7880@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7881Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7882language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7883
7884@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7885@item
252b5132
RH
7886S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7887
7888@item
7889IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7890
7891@item
7892COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7893@samp{COFF}
7894@end enumerate
7895
7896@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7897@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7898Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7899@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7900
7901The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7902same line, with no change in its effect.
7903
7904@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7905@item LOAD @var{filename}
7906@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7907Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7908same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7909command line.
7910
7911@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7912@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7913@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7914MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7915option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7916
7917@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7918@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7919@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7920Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7921order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7922script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7923sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7924file, in the order specified.
7925
7926@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7927@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7928@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7929@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7930Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7931@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7932
7933@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7934@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7935@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7936@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7937You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7938specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7939If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7940@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7941@end table
7942
793c5807
NC
7943@node GNU Free Documentation License
7944@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7945@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7946
370b66a1
CD
7947@node LD Index
7948@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7949
7950@printindex cp
7951
7952@tex
7ca01ed9 7953% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
7954% meantime:
7955\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7956\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7957\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7958\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7959\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7960\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7961\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7962\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7963\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 7964% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
7965@end tex
7966
252b5132 7967@bye
This page took 1.102542 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.